AKSUM UNIVERSITY

AKSUM INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING

B.Sc. Program in Electrical and Computer Engineering

(Communication Engineering, Computer Engineering,

Industrial Control Engineering, and Electrical Power
Engineering Focus Areas)

Regular Five-Year Program Modularized Curriculum

|Page
Endorsement

This document is Endorsed by:

The Academic Council of Electrical and Computer Engineering, AIT, AKU

Date Endorsed: ___________________

Aksum, Ethiopia

i|Page
Imprint

1st Revision - August 2012

2nd Revision - March 2013

3rd Revision – September 2013

4th Revision- September 2020

The curriculum is prepared by

The Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering
Aksum Institute of Technology
Aksum University
Curriculum Review/Reform Committee

Axum, December 2023

ii | P a g e
Executive summary
Name of the program: Electrical and Computer Engineering (Communication
Engineering, Computer Engineering, industrial Control Engineering, Electrical
Power Engineering Focus Areas)

Name of the degree to be awarded: Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and

Computer Engineering (Communication Engineering, Computer Engineering,
Industrial Control Engineering, Electrical Power Engineering Focus Areas)

Degree nomenclature:
“Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Communication Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካል እና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኮምኒኬሽን ዘርፍ)”
“Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Electrical Power Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካል እና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኤሌክትሪካል ፓወር ዘርፍ)”
“Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Computer Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካልእና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኮምፒዩተር ዘርፍ)”
“Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Industrial Control Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካል እና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኢንዱስተርያል ኮንትሮል ዘርፍ)”

Standard period of study: 5 Years/10 Semesters for regular

6 Years/12 Semesters for extension

Degree to be awarded by: Aksum University/Aksum Institute of

Technology/Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Total Credit Point (CP):

324 for Communication Engineering Department.
324 for Computer Engineering Department.
318 for Electrical Power Engineering Department.
324 for Industrial Control Engineering Department.

Commencement of the Curriculum: - 2023/2024

iii | P a g e
 Table contents
Contents
Endorsement .................................................................................................................................... i
Imprint ............................................................................................................................................. ii
Executive summary ......................................................................................................................... iii
Table contents ................................................................................................................................ iv
Preamble .......................................................................................................................................... 0
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Background ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Vision............................................................................................................................... 1
2. Rationale for the Curriculum ................................................................................................... 1
3. Goals and Objectives ............................................................................................................... 3
3.1 General Objectives........................................................................................................... 3
3.2 Specific Objectives .......................................................................................................... 3
4. Program Profiles ...................................................................................................................... 3
4.1 Curriculum Structure ....................................................................................................... 3
4.2 Program Composition .................................................................................................... 10
4.3 Course Profile ................................................................................................................ 10
4.4 Graduate Profile ............................................................................................................. 11
5. Academic Requirements ........................................................................................................ 13
5.1 Admission and Transfer ................................................................................................. 13
5.2 Study and Focus Area Placement .................................................................................. 13
5.3 Graduation Requirement ................................................................................................ 14
5.4 Degree Nomenclature .................................................................................................... 14
6. Teaching and Learning Modalities ........................................................................................ 14
6.1 Methodology .................................................................................................................. 15
6.2 Resources ....................................................................................................................... 15
6.2.1 Human Resources ......................................................................................................... 15
6.2.2 Laboratory Facilities ..................................................................................................... 16
6.3 Tools .............................................................................................................................. 16
6.4 Skills to be developed .................................................................................................... 16
6.5 Addressing Learning Needs of All Students.................................................................. 17
6.6 Strategies ....................................................................................................................... 17
6.7 Interactive Blended e-learning ....................................................................................... 17

iv | P a g e
 6.8 Project-Based Learning ................................................................................................. 18
6.9 Participatory Learning ................................................................................................... 18
7. Assessment and Quality Assurance ....................................................................................... 19
7.1 Examination System ...................................................................................................... 19
7.2 Grading System ............................................................................................................. 19
7.3 Quality Assurance Management .................................................................................... 20
7.4 Credit Transfer System .................................................................................................. 21
8. Modules and Courses............................................................................................................. 21
8.1. Modules ............................................................................................................................. 21
8.1.2. Module Coding and Lists of Courses in Modules ................................................. 21
8.2. Course ............................................................................................................................ 25
8.2.1. Course Coding ....................................................................................................... 25
8.2.2. Semester Breakdown ............................................................................................. 25
Core Electrical and Computer Engineering ........................................................................... 25
Communication Engineering ................................................................................................. 27
Computer Engineering ........................................................................................................... 28
Industrial Control Engineering .............................................................................................. 29
Electrical Power Engineering ................................................................................................. 30
8.3. Course Description and Syllabus ................................................................................... 31
8.3.1. Moral and Civics Education.................................................................................... 31
8.3.2. Communicative English Skills I ............................................................................... 36
8.3.3. Communicative English Skills II .............................................................................. 40
8.3.4. Critical Thinking ..................................................................................................... 42
8.3.5. General Psychology................................................................................................ 46
7.3.6. Physical Fitness ...................................................................................................... 50
7.3.7. Geography of Ethiopia and the Horn ..................................................................... 53
8.3.8. Social Anthropology ............................................................................................... 56
8.3.9. General Physics ...................................................................................................... 60
8.9.10. Computer Programming ........................................................................................ 64
8.3.11. Introduction to Emerging Technologies ................................................................ 67
8.3.12. Engineering Drawing .............................................................................................. 69
8.3.13. Engineering Mechanics (Statics) ............................................................................ 71
8.3.14. Engineering Laboratory I........................................................................................ 76
8.3.15. Signals and Systems Analysis ................................................................................. 77
8.3.16. Network Analysis and Synthesis ............................................................................ 80

v|Page
8.3.17. Applied Electronics I .............................................................................................. 83
8.3.18. Applied Electronics II ............................................................................................. 85
8.3.19. Electrical Workshop Practice I ............................................................................... 87
8.3.20. Electrical Workshop Practice II .............................................................................. 90
8.3.21. Computational Methods........................................................................................ 93
8.3.22. Digital Logic Design ................................................................................................ 96
8.3.23. Electrical Engineering Lab II ................................................................................... 99
8.3.24. Introduction to Power Systems ........................................................................... 101
8.3.25. Electrical Engineering Lab-IV ............................................................................... 104
8.3.26. Electrical Engineering Lab III ................................................................................ 107
8.3.27. Applied Modern Physics ...................................................................................... 110
8.3.28. Introduction to Communications Systems .......................................................... 112
8.3.29. Electrical Materials and Technology .................................................................... 116
8.9.30. Electrical Materials and Technology .................................................................... 119
8.3.31. Electromagnetic Fields ......................................................................................... 122
8.3.32. Research Methods and Presentation .................................................................. 125
8.3.33. Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation .............................................................. 128
8.3.34. Data Communication and Computer Networks .................................................. 131
8.3.35. Communication Systems ..................................................................................... 134
8.3.36. Introduction to Photonics .................................................................................... 137
8.3.37. Optics and Optical Communication ..................................................................... 140
8.3.38. EM Waves and Guide Structures ......................................................................... 143
8.3.39. Microelectronic Devices and Circuits .................................................................. 147
8.3.40. Microwave Devices and Systems ......................................................................... 150
8.3.41. Computer Architecture and Organization ............................................................ 154
8.3.42. Embedded Systems.............................................................................................. 157
8.3.43. Microcomputers and Interfacing ......................................................................... 159
8.3.44. Algorithm Analysis and Design ............................................................................ 162
8.3.45. Data Structures .................................................................................................... 165
8.3.46. Introduction to Compiler ..................................................................................... 168
8.3.46. Computer and Network Security ......................................................................... 172
8.3.47. Software Engineering........................................................................................... 175
8.3.48. Database Systems ................................................................................................ 178
8.3.49. Introduction to Instrumentation ......................................................................... 180
8.3.50. Instrumentation Engineering ............................................................................... 182

vi | P a g e
8.3.51. Introduction to Control Systems.......................................................................... 184
8.3.52. Modern Control Systems ..................................................................................... 186
8.3.53. Digital Control Systems ........................................................................................ 189
8.3.54. Industrial Process Control and Automation ........................................................ 192
8.3.55. Introduction to Robotics ...................................................................................... 195
8.3.56. Introduction to Power System Automation ........................................................ 198
8.3.57. Energy Conversion and Rural Electrification ....................................................... 200
8.3.58. Power System Protection, Operation and Control .............................................. 204
8.3.59. Power Systems ..................................................................................................... 207
8.3.60. Electrical Installation............................................................................................ 210
8.3.61. Power System Planning & Management ............................................................. 213
8.3.62. Power System Protection .................................................................................... 216

vii | P a g e
Preamble
The Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering is preparing young men and women to lead productive
and rewarding professional lives at the fore front of Electrical and Computer Engineering in the 21st century
and pursues research and development in relevant industries to advance the state-of-the-art in electrical and
computer engineering.
The Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering (FECE) is one of the largest Faculties in the Aksum
Institute of Technology (AIT) of Aksum University (AKU). At present, the faculty is running a five years
B.Sc. degree program in a unified Electrical and Computer Engineering program. The graduates of the
faculty have profound knowledge in basic science, mathematics, social science and the major disciplines:
Communication Systems Engineering, Power system Engineering, Control Systems Engineering, and
Computer Engineering. In addition, the faculty is planning and pending to launch a five years B.Sc. degree
program in Biomedical Engineering.
Electrical and Computer Engineering plays a vital role in the development of the country. The development
of the energy, communication, industrial and commercial sectors need well-qualified Electrical and
Computer Engineers. Our graduates are working all over the country in a variety of jobs. They work in
installation, design, testing, operation, maintenance, research, and sales of electrical devices and systems.
Many of our graduates are employed in Ethiopian Electric Utility, Ethiopian Electric Power, Ethiopian
Telecommunication Corporation, Ethiopian Airlines and in various other public and private industries and
organizations.
It is being observed that there is a widespread and fast change in the application and development of
Electrical and Computer Engineering in the country and the world at large. Today’s Electrical and
Computer Engineers must be able to find solutions to new, complex, and challenging technical problems.
They must have strong scientific, technical and managerial skills to be able to integrate technical concepts
with practical applications. This professional profile is prepared for curriculum revision. In the new
curriculum, more attention has been given to:

▪ Current technological advancement in the area,

▪ The demand from the industries (need of the country),
▪ Increasing the linkage between the industry and the faculty,
▪ Enhancing the innovative and problem solving skill of the graduates.
Taking into consideration the requirements of modern industries the department has realized that there is a
need to implement the following four specializations (Focus Area) in the present undergraduate
engineering courses.
▪ Communication Engineering,
▪ Electrical Power Engineering,
▪ Computer Engineering,
▪ Industrial Control Engineering, and
The coverage of these specialized areas will be given during the last three semesters of the present B.Sc.
program.

0|Page
 1. Introduction

1.1 Background

In the modern-days, development of a country mainly depends on the advancements of its industries. The
development of the industries significantly depends on the standard of technical education nurtured by the
universities and the technical institutes of the country.

It is observed that in most of the developed countries a strong relationship between the universities and the
industries is maintained. It is believed that the universities are the sources of new technologies. Universities
develop new knowledge and technologies and by co-operating with industries they promote these
technologies to raise the standard, productivities, and efficiencies of the industries. Universities often take
the leading responsibilities of providing qualified human resources for the industries of any country.

The Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering (FECE) is one of the seven Faculties in the Aksum
Institute of Technology of Aksum University launched in2007/ 2002 E.C. The faculty has been serving the
country and also advancing the University’s reputation. It has trained a significant number of Electrical
and Computer Engineers in the country who are playing key roles in the various economic sectors of the
country.

The main aim of the faculty in realizing its vision and mission are to carryout quality education, research,
industrial linkage, community services, and other scholarly activities to become a center of excellence in
its undergraduate and postgraduate programs, thereby raising its national and international standings.

1.2 Vision

The Vision of the Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering stems from the Vision of Aksum
Institute of Technology and aspires to excel in teaching, research, community services, consultancy, and
industry linkage at national and regional levels and produce competent engineers in the field of electrical,
electronic, and computer engineering to solve the problems of our country and bring about sustainable
growth.

Realization of this vision requires focusing on specializations relevant to the need of the country; namely,
Communication Engineering, Electrical Power Engineering, Computer Engineering, Industrial Control
Engineering, this vision subsequently demands the upgrading of the department to Faculty where each
discipline may evolve to independent departments.

2. Rationale for the Curriculum

Engineering in general and electrical and computer engineering in particular is a highly dynamic field of
study in that the rapid development of the technology doesn’t allow leaving academic curricula untouched
for a long time. Thus, to minimize the gap between the state-of-the-art and the teaching process and
maintain the relevance and educational standard, there is always a need for curricula review.

The basic rationales for all of the courses of the faculty’s programs are the prevailing conditions in the
Country with respect to the needs for professionals in this area and the future trends. The staff of the faculty
1|Page
has been keenly following the developments in this regard both within the Country and internationally and
the following provides some of the major facts and observations on which the program is revised.

Over the years, the faculty has trained students with the undergraduate instructions that have followed both
the national needs and the rapid growth of the discipline internationally- and have now reached a point
where graduates of its undergraduate program are equipped with sufficient theoretical and practical skills
that would enable them to be engaged in work in the Electrical/Electronic sector of the national economy.

Ethiopia, like many of the developing countries, is essentially a user of products of Electrical Engineering
technology. So far, the undergraduate program is designed to meet the needs of the main employers of the
graduates in the operation and maintenance of electrical and electronic equipment and machines. To meet
these needs, the program is made broad enough to cover most major areas of electrical engineering such as
power, electronics, communications, control, and computer without any particular specialization. But it
has now become necessary to look ahead to the future needs of the country and provide educational to meet
these needs.

It is still logical to maintain the broad nature of the undergraduate curriculum that affords the graduates
versatility in terms of employment. But it has now become necessary to look ahead to the future needs of
the Country and provide educational opportunities to meet these needs. The current revision of the
curriculum has therefore addressed these needs by strengthening all streams namely power,
communications, electronics, control, and computer.

With the advent of microelectronics, computers and computer-based equipment the profession of electrical
and computer engineering has found wider applications in industry and other sectors. The declining prices
for electrical and computer equipment, components, and devices have also made them affordable and
therefore accessible to large segments of the industries. Furthermore, computer applications have now been
diversified and the traditional use of the computer in data processing and other computational application
are only a small part of these diverse applications.

The convergence of computers and communication technologies has made it imperative to provide
education that imports knowledge and skill in these two fields concurrently. The Faculty of Electrical and
computer Engineering is well prepared to offer such an experience through its currently revised curriculum.

Finally, the aim of the revised curriculum is to produce electrical engineers who are flexible across various
disciplines; and are able to apply their knowledge and skills to lead multi-disciplinary teams to solve the
increasingly complex problems of relevant industries and organizations.

2|Page
 3. Goals and Objectives

3.1 General Objectives

The general objectives of this revised BSc degree curriculum are:

▪ To train high level technical manpower which can participate in the national development
activities;
▪ To carry out research in the areas of electrical & computer engineering and relevant to the needs
of the Country;
▪ To render consultancy services to the community.

3.2 Specific Objectives

The specific objectives of the revised curriculum are:

▪ To train electrical and computer engineers.

▪ To prepare graduates with the capability of following the current and future developments in the
field and related applications.
▪ To enable graduates work as a team in addressing technical problems
▪ To provide opportunity for workers in the field of electrical technology to upgrade their knowledge
through a continuing education evening program.
▪ To provide graduates with sufficient background to undertake postgraduate training in any one of
the various focus areas of Electrical Engineering discipline.
▪ To engage students in research that offers optimal solutions to technical problems in the industry,
energy sector, telecommunications, computer applications and other industrial sectors.
▪ To offer consultancy service to government, industry and society.

4. Program Profiles

4.1 Curriculum Structure

The new Electrical and Computer Engineering curriculum focuses on broad-based training to provide
flexibility of career choices and focused training to provide competence in particular electrical and
computer Engineering profession that deals with the technology of electricity and electronics, especially
the design and application of electronic circuit, equipment for power generation and distribution, machine
control, communications and computer hardware and software. It strikes a balance between breadth and
depth to provide a solid foundation in the basic engineering, mathematics, electrical engineering on one
hand, and comprehensive training in humanities and management on the other.

The assessment semester is intended to consolidate the students' educational background for higher
learning and further help them to adapt to the system.

In the five consecutive semesters, after the common assessment semester, all the students take courses
mainly in the core electrical engineering category. This provides them with a broad background for all
areas of electrical and computer engineering.
3|Page
In the last two years, students are given the opportunity to focus on one of the five areas, namely
communication engineering, electrical power engineering, computer engineering and industrial control
engineering as shown in the flowchart below. The students are placed to the streams based on their interest,
inclination, and the cumulative grade point (CGPA).
The freshman courses are developed nationally by MoE and are intended to consolidate the students'
educational background for higher learning while providing important knowledge in Physics, Psychology,
logical and critical thinking, geography and history of Ethiopian and the horn, civics, emerging
technologies and physical fitness.

In the third semester students will join the pre-engineering program and take courses in engineering
drawing, engineering mechanics (Statics), engineering mathematics and probability and random process.

In the final three semesters, students are given the opportunity to focus on one of the five area, namely
communication engineering, electrical power engineering, computer engineering, industrial control
engineering and electronics engineering as shown in the flowchart.

Admission

2 Common Assessment Semesters

Humanity & Social Sciences
Engineering Sciences & Mathematics

4th – 7th Common Semesters Core

Electrical Engineering

Focus?

8th Semester 8th Semester 8th Semester 8th Semesters

Communication Electrical Power Computer Industrial Control

Engineering Engineering Engineering Engineering

9th semester
Industry Internship

5th year 2 semester 5th year 2 Semester 5th year 2 semester 5th year 2 semester
& B.Sc. Project & B.Sc. Project &B.Sc. Project
& B.Sc. Project
Electrical Power Computer Industrial Control
Communication Engineering
Engineering Engineering
Engineering

The courses are organized as in the following categories:

4|Page
I. Lecture Oriented Category
a) Freshman Courses-Humanity and Social Science Modules
▪ This module helps the students to know the responsibilities and duties of a good citizen, so that
their participation in the development of democratic society becomes effective;
▪ To create the power of critical thinking the module provides the techniques & methods for testing
the correctness of many different kind of reasoning including their own and thereby errors are
easily detected;
▪ To develop effective ways of expressing themselves as well as expressing the technical details in
terms of speaking and writing of English;
▪ To understand the role of the cost-effective methods of doing every task the students are exposed
to the role of economics in society and the role of engineering economy;
▪ To understand the role of managers, applicable to different departments of various industries.
▪ To gain advanced knowledge in natural science subjects.
▪ To understand, first hand, about their country region geography.
b) Scientific and Engineering Fundamentals Module

This module helps the student to learn the engineering languages like that of Mathematics and Engineering
Drawing and also provides the fundamental concepts of Physics for the electrical engineers. It helps the
students

▪ To understand and apply the various concepts of calculus, differential equations, linear algebra and
various engineering series and sequences;
▪ To understand and express random events for representing the behaviors of signals embedded in
noises;
▪ To be able to apply various computational methods for modeling technical operations;
▪ To understand the fundamental concepts of Statics, and Dynamics for engineering applications;
▪ To know and practice the representation in engineering drawing.
c) Core Electrical Engineering Module

This module is the heart of the curriculum, which provides foundation for the electrical engineering. At
later stage, students can take up the studies of specialization on any other branches of Electrical
Engineering.

▪ To understand the fundamental concepts of electrical and electronic engineering;

▪ To be able to understand the concept of computer architecture and programming and able to apply
to real life applications;
▪ To be able to understand and analyze electrical networks, signal, and systems;
▪ To be able to understand the concept of various electrical machines and electrical power system;
▪ To learn the digital signal processing techniques and to be able to bring solution to the problems
of real time signal;
▪ To understand the microprocessor and micro controller and their interfacing and to be able to
handle this hardware;

5|Page
 ▪ To understand the fundamentals of electronic communication and control system.
d) Communication Engineering Module

Communication engineering involves the transfer of information such as voice, music, data, videos or
graphics, between people or machines at different locations. This focus area helps the student to get the
exposure on the fundamentals of most commonly used electronic communication techniques in
telecommunication and data communication systems. These students will be able to undertake the higher
studies on Electronic Communication. On the completion of courses in this stream students will be able:

▪ To participate in design and maximize the utilization of communication links and network
efficiently and with the least possible delay and adequate quality;
▪ To participate in research in the area of system design/networking and bring solutions in
operational settings;
▪ To solve problems in intensive signal processing and routing of information packets.
e) Electrical Power Engineering Module

Students will study power system planning, design, operation, protection and control. They will gain basic
knowledge of electrical power generation, transmission, distribution and utilization of electrical energy.
They will also study the economic aspects of power generation, transmission and distribution systems. The
focus area offers courses to familiarize one with modern power system analysis, design, planning,
operation, control, and protection of power systems. At the end of the study, the student is expected to:

▪ To understand all the components of a power system including generation, transmission, and
distribution;
▪ To participate in research in the area of system design/networking and bring solutions in
operational settings;
▪ To solve power system problems.
f) Computer Engineering Module

Computer Engineering involves the design and analysis of computer systems. It encompasses both
hardware and software design. The focus area offers courses such as computer architecture,
microcomputer, software engineering, computer networking and others. At the end of the study, the student
is expected to:

▪ To understand all the components of a computer hardware and software;

▪ To participate in research in the area of system design/networking;
g) Industrial Control Engineering Module

Students will study the characteristics and designs of industrial automation process. Control and
automation are one of the fast-growing branches of electrical engineering with the advent of electronics
and computer. Its application and employment opportunity are almost everywhere in industry and
commercial offices. In this focus area process control, industrial automation, modern and digital control

6|Page
 engineering, power electronics and drive courses, are given in depth to prepare the student for practical
challenges in real world and for post graduate study. At the end of the study, the student is expected to:

▪ To assist in the analysis and design of practical industrial control systems;

▪ To participate in research in the area of industrial control and instrumentation system;
▪ To solve industry problems that can result in maximum efficiency and productivity.
II. Practice Oriented Categories
a) Community based education

As the Community Based Education is the University’s philosophy of training, the Department of Electrical
and Computer Engineering has incorporated the Community Based Training Program in its curriculum as
a component in its modular organization. The Community Based Education provides multi-disciplinary
training and integrated teaching that incorporates the University and the surrounding Community.

The community-based education module contains the following courses:

▪ Demographic Survey and Community problem identification

▪ Appropriate Technology
▪ Action plan development and Intervention phase
b) Workshop Courses

The students, during the assessment semester, will have the chance to hands-on exercises dealing with
basic metalwork, woodwork, masonry, and electricity. This will help them know the basic workshop
activities and also choose their field of study from the available engineering disciplines.

After the assessment semester, the students will have a series of workshop courses specific to their field of
specialization.

c) Internship (Industry Placement)

In industry internship students must be attached with an industry for one regular semester in order to get
real world experience in their field of study, which compliments their education.

▪ General

Electrical and Computer Engineering program requires a one-semester internship (industry placement)
after the successful completion of eight semester of the program. During the internship, the daily and
monthly working times follow the systems practiced in the respective industry for the upper middle-level
management. Specifically, they follow the system practiced in the respective company that hosts the
student. As a rule, the entire internship period has to be spent in a single company; a change of company
during the internship period will only be permitted under extraordinary circumstances. In such a case, the
decision is with the University-Industry Linkage (UIL) Officer.

An orientation program, organized by the UIL Officer will accompany the internship semester.
Participation in the seminar program is compulsory (mandatory).

7|Page
At the end of the internship, the student submits to the UIL Officer a comprehensive report, duly endorsed
by the student’s host company. The report is assigned 25 ECTS. The required format and assessment of
the report is detailed in the Curriculum Handbook for the department. The report will be assessed by
specifically assigned internship program evaluator (or university professors/lecturers).

▪ Objectives

The internship program has the following objective(s):

▪ Expansion of knowledge and acquaintance with industry in the field of Electrical and Computer
Engineering.
▪ Consolidation and deepening of existing knowledge in the Electrical and Computer Engineering
design and construction industry.
▪ Participation in the development, manufacture and assembly of products typical for the industry.
▪ Involvement in the planning, steering and management of the design & construction processes.
▪ Hands-on training in practical skills typical for the industry. Typically, this would be participation
– individually or within a (task) group – in real assignments/projects, which entail the application
of knowledge and skills attained so far during the studies at University – and aiming at developing
special skills related to the industrial practice in one or several of the following fields (depending
on the type of industry and company profile):
• Design and construction.
• Laboratory (quality monitoring) work.
• Task management (labor management, logistics).
• Business management, Marketing.
▪ Proof of Finishing an Internship Semester

In order to acknowledge an internship semester the student must submit a written report to the Internship
Coordinator. This must be signed by the student’s host company. This report is written solely by the student
and contains information on the working-out of larger or smaller themes, with which the student is
confronted during the work in the company. It can include literature study. The report must document the
areas in which the student has worked and the specific knowledge obtained as a result.

For the internship the host company must issue a certificate on the industry project. At the end of the
internship the student has to make a presentation (final seminar) on the results of the industry project.

The internship semester is granted 25 ECTS points if the student has successfully passed the semester.

▪ Cost

All matters related to the cost of the internship process will follow Government legislations. The following
items should be included in the budget preparation:

▪ Insurance (accident during work & trips to/from work)

▪ Long-distance travel cost (if company is far from University, e.g. another region)

8|Page
 ▪ Daily travel to/from work
▪ Travel to/from University (e.g. from location of company) to attend the mandatory seminar
▪ program organized by the University (if any)
▪ Accommodation, if the workplace is far from the University
▪ Cost for printing the comprehensive report
▪ Remuneration for the internship from the company, if any.

d) B.Sc. Thesis

The B.Sc. Thesis is the final element of the B.Sc. study program. The main goal of this course is to develop
the individual creative and problem solving ability of graduates. Students will receive a group project
specification from various areas and work them out in groups under the supervision of faculty advisor
or/and professional advisor from the industry. The candidate use all the theoretical knowledge and practical
skill he obtained during his/her study to solve the engineering problem in a scientific way which includes
problem analysis, solution, verification, implementation, documentation, and presentation. B.Sc. Thesis is
defended in front of the official committee at the end of the study.

Teaching-Learning Methods and Materials

The basic teaching method is lecture supported by tutorial, design projects, practical laboratory exercises
and, in some cases, by simulation. Audio-visual aids are also used to support lectures. Students are assigned
to work on design projects to enable them enhance innovative and independent working ability. The
industry internship is also an integral part of the teaching-learning process. Students are provided with
handouts and teaching materials.

Quality Assurance

Quality assurance can be used as an instrument to improve the system continuously, install accountability
and enable compatibility with other higher education systems. The quality of the program is assessed in
terms of the instruction performance and impact of program on the quality of graduates looking for a job
or further studies. The following factors help to ensure the quality of the education:

▪ In order to maintain the level of courses, course descriptions are prepared in detail containing
course objectives, learning outcome, course outline, textbooks, references and laboratory tasks.

▪ With regard to instruction performance, in line with the University policy, student evaluations are
taken into account. The feedbacks from the students are used to improve the quality of instruction.

▪ Examinations are assessed by Faculty Examination Committee to verify the level of the course
instruction.

▪ Industry feedback will be an integral part of the process of quality assurance. The quality of
graduates is measured with the feedback obtained from the employers and stakeholders who are
the immediate beneficiaries of the program and also the graduates who are able to rate their own
confidence in meeting the challenges they encounter after graduation.

9|Page
4.2 Program Composition
The conventional credit system used in higher education systems is mainly based on
student contact hours in class and laboratory sessions. A new system of credit system is
introduced that takes the extra hours a student spends for the course in addition to
lectures, tutorials, and laboratory practical. In ECTS credits are values, allocated to course
units, to describe the student workload required to complete a course including attending
lectures, seminars, independent and private study, preparation of projects and
examinations. In this revised curriculum, the ECTS equivalent of the old credit system has
been estimated and shown for each course in the course breakdown. In ECTS, one credit
stands for 25-30 hours of work activity. A semester study within this system is set at 30
ECTS points (750-900 hours).
The total credit point’s requirement for graduation in any one of the program is 318-319
CPs are covered during the first seven common semesters composed of courses from the
three basic categories: Humanity and social science, Scientific and engineering
fundamentals and Core electrical and Computer engineering. The remaining credit points,
i.e., 94 CPs on average, are given during the last three focus area semesters which consists
of department courses, Internship and B.Sc. Thesis. The categories are summarized in the
following table.
Table 1: Course Categories

Category ECTS Percent

Humanity and Social Sciences 12.04
Engineering Science and Mathematics 12.62
Core Electrical and Computer Engineering 42.52
Focus Area (Average) 23.49
Internship & Project 9.32
Percentage Total 100

4.3 Course Profile

Electrical and Computer Engineering is the branch of engineering that deals with the technology of
electricity and electronics, especially the design and application of electronic circuit, equipment for power
generation and distribution, machine control, communications and computer hardware and software. Thus,
the courses are designed to inculcate knowledge and skills required in the following professional activities
during the study and after graduation in general.

I. Research and Development

▪ Developing of new products on existing or new technologies.
▪ Applied research on new technologies and improving the existing technology.
II. Design
10 | P a g e
 ▪ Designing of required system and /or devices for indigenization (modifying)
▪ Designing of interface unit to adapt existing devices with new system.
▪ Modifying existing system to enhance its utilization.
III. Production/Manufacturing
▪ Supervising, modifying and optimizing manufacturing process to improve cost effective yields
with quality.
IV. Installation, Operation and Maintenance
▪ After understanding the procedures as given in manual of manufacturer is able to install, operate
and maintain the systems.
V. Analysis and Testing
▪ Analyzing and developing test set-ups for testing system/devices to assess the quality, safety and
reliability of performance of the system.
▪ Trouble shooting and repairing the system.
VI. Sales, Consultation and Purchase
▪ Sales person for National/ International Companies.
▪ Consulting Companies to optimize the price-performance of systems.
▪ Defining and justifying the requirements for sales and purchase.
VII. Basic Abilities, Skills
▪ Able to understand the state of art techniques, devices, software, protocols.
▪ Proceeding in methodical approach to solve problems.
▪ Being a team member communicative, cooperative and transparent.
▪ Working independently, assuming responsibility.
▪ Leading, motivating and caring professionals.
▪ Managing the project, productions, manpower and resources cost effectively.
▪ Learning life-long, improving the skills and exploring new areas.
▪ Observing national and international standards and regulation.
VIII. Engineering Knowledge
▪ Fundamental knowledge in engineering mathematics.
▪ Fundamental knowledge in physics, EM fields, semiconductors, electrical materials,
thermodynamics, static and dynamics.
▪ Knowledge in electrical machines, electronic analogue and digital circuits, signal & system,
measurements, control, microprocessor and communication.
▪ Knowledge in computer hardware and software.

4.4 Graduate Profile

The following streams (focus areas) of Electrical and Computer Engineering are identified as very
important for the development of the country.

I. Electrical and Computer Engineer with Communication Engineering Focus

They are able to

11 | P a g e
 ▪ Design and test electronic circuits.
▪ Design and maximize the utilization of communication network efficiently and with the least
possible delay and adequate quality.
▪ Carry out research in the area of system design/networking and bring solution in operational
settings.
▪ Solve problems in intensive signal processing and routing of information packets.
▪ Teach, design and conduct laboratory experiments in the area of communication engineering
II. Electrical and Computer Engineer with Electrical Power Engineering Focus

They are able to

▪ Plan, design, analyze, develop, operate, control and maintain of electrical power plants (thermal,
hydro, renewable), power apparatus and protection system.
▪ Plan, design, analyze and develop power transmission and distribution system.
▪ Design, analysis, construction, installation, control, operation and maintenance of electrical
machines, power electronic devices and drives.
▪ Teach, design and conduct laboratory experiments in the area of electrical power engineering
III. Electrical and Computer Engineer with Computer Engineering Focus

They are able to

▪ Design, develop, analyze and test the hardware and software for systems applicable to any
industries, business, hospitals, institutions and offices.
▪ Install, operate and maintain computer systems.
▪ Work as a computer hardware engineer, software engineer, system analyst, data communication
analyst, computer network engineer, database analyst, data administrator, network administrator,
information systems quality assurance analyst, information system consultant, system tester,
system security analyst, customer support analyst, system auditor, computer service engineer, web
designer, webmaster, interactive media developer.
▪ Teach, design and conduct laboratory experiments in the area of computer engineering
IV. Electrical and Computer Engineer with Industrial Control Engineering Focus

They are able to

▪ Design, develop and analyze of control and instrumentation system applied for monitoring, data
acquisition and data analysis of electrical and non-electrical systems including digital, analogue,
robust and higher order controllers.
▪ Plan, produce, install, implement, operate and maintain the control and instrumentation systems.
▪ Teach, design and conduct laboratory experiments in the area of control engineering

12 | P a g e
5. Academic Requirements

5.1 Admission and Transfer

Admissions to all regular undergraduate programs are processed through the Ministry of Education (MoE)
of the Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia. This is currently true for all public Higher Education
Institutes across the whole nation. Admissions to the continuing education program (CEP) are processed
through the faculty’s registrar office based on the criteria set by the University.

Students who have successfully completed the secondary education and have secured a minimum cutoff
point set by the MoE in Faculty leaving certificate examination and with high scores in Physics and
Mathematics are eligible to join the regular undergraduate B.Sc. degree program in Electrical and
Computer Engineering.

Depending on available spaces, diploma graduates from TVET (Technical Vocational Education and
Training) in the fields of Electrical and Computer Engineering will be admitted based on grades on
competitive basis.

Applicants with a minimum cutoff point and with high scores in Physics and Mathematics in foreign
countries examinations equivalent to the ESLCE are also eligible. The equivalence is determined by the
Faculty.

Limited numbers of junior staff such as technical assistants in relevant field may be admitted each year
based on non-competitive basis provided that he/she:
a) Has served the University for a Minimum of 2 consecutive years.
b) Meets the minimum admission requirement set for the program.
c) Obtain letter of recommendation from the Head of the Department and approval the College
Academic Commission and consequently, letter of Admission from the University’s Registrar.
d) Signs an undertaking to serve the University after graduation, at least two years of service for
one complete year of study.

5.2 Study and Focus Area Placement

After successful completion of the common semesters (1st and 2nd semesters), students will choose
academic studies according to their desired field of study. In view of the high number of applicants,
admission to the Electrical and Computer Engineering department is usually on competitive basis based on
academic performance. However, 20% of the total available places shall be reserved for females in addition
to their right to compete in the 80% places.

A student who wishes to join a stream better has a passing grade in the corresponding course as listed
below. The rationale for putting theses prerequisite courses is that:
● He/she will be delayed from graduation at least by one year from his/her batch and that will cause
organizational problems in him/herself and also to the faculty.

● A student who does not score a pass grade in these courses may encounter difficulties in related

13 | P a g e
 courses once he/she joins the focus area.

Focus Area Prerequisite Course

Communication Engineering Introduction to Communication Systems
Computer Engineering Computer architecture and Organization
Industrial Control Engineering Introduction to Control Systems
Electrical Power Engineering Introduction to Power Systems

In the cases of placing students into respective streams, if there is a mismatch between demand and
capacity, the group chairs shall develop criteria using not more than three core courses of the streams. In
such a way, the streams can uphold competition and merit-based selection when the competition gets tight.

5.3 Graduation Requirement

Students must take and pass all the required modules to satisfy the requirements for graduation. The total
required modules for graduation with the Degree of Bachelor of Science in Electrical and Computer
Engineering varies in each focus area; it includes
➢ Completing course work, i.e.,
▪ General Education and Engineering; Supportive courses; Core/Major courses; and Electives
without F grade in any course

➢ Minimum Overall CGPA of 2.00 and Core (Major) CGPA 2.00;

➢ Fulfillment of the Industry Attachment requirement;
➢ Conduct an independent research work, the B.Sc. Thesis
➢ A student should take a minimum of 316 ECTS for graduation.

5.4 Degree Nomenclature

After successful completion of all the requirements a student graduating from the Electrical and Computer
Engineering department in one of the respective focus areas will be entitled:
• “Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Communication Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካል እና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኮምኒኬሽን ዘርፍ))”
• “Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Electrical Power Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካል እና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኤሌክትሪካል ፓወር ዘርፍ)”
• “Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Computer Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካልእና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኮምፒዩተር ዘርፍ)”
• “Bachelor of Science Degree in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Industrial Control Focus)”
“የባችለር ሳይንስ ዲግሪ በኤሌክትሪካል እና ኮምፒተር ምህንድስና (ኢንዱስተርያል ኮንትሮል ዘርፍ)”

6. Teaching and Learning Modalities

The core philosophy of the teaching-learning process would be focused at producing a graduate who is
sensitized towards community problems and who can bring about a capable change employable problem
solver through knowledge application in the real life setting tuned towards continuous self-learning, and
geared up to meet challenges and to carry forward the task of industrial and national development.
14 | P a g e
6.1 Methodology

The teaching-learning methods to be adopted, for the transfer and/or acquisition of knowledge and skill
development includes
▪ Classroom Lectures backed up by Course-Work Projects, Tutorials and Assignments,
▪ Lectures by Industry professionals and resource persons on a periodic basis
▪ Interactive based “Blended E-Learning” and other such self-learning modules,
▪ Workshop Practice and Laboratory Exercises,
▪ Practical Demonstrations,
▪ Audio-Visual teaching materials,
▪ Cut-Sectional Model Studies,
▪ Wall mounted display charts
▪ Field visits related to community development/intervention
▪ Industrial visits.
▪ Practical and development oriented design projects
▪ Individual and group seminars/Presentations
▪ Group tasks/discussions/Case studies
▪ Brain storming sessions
▪ Assembling/disassembling of real world prototypes

Taking a cue from the dictum of learning which says- “You may hear and forget, you may see and
remember but you do and learn”, action oriented and student-centered learning would be emphasized as
the modus operandi while underlining the significance of inducing curiosity for continuous self-learning
as the catalyst for effective assimilation of knowledge and its application in concrete situations.

6.2 Resources
The Electrical and Computer Engineering program should be equipped with the necessary
resources and equipment to meet its objectives. The kind of resources can be classified as human
resources, teaching and learning facilities – Lab, Libraries, Workshops, Computer labs etc.

6.2.1 Human Resources

The program should have staff from several disciplines to deliver the lecture, tutorials and
laboratory sessions. Supportive courses should be delivered by the respective departments. The
program leaders can also arrange a joint delivery of some courses when deemed appropriate.

Sex Technical BSC. MSc. PhD. In study

Assistance Holder Holder Holder MSc. PhD.

M 13 7 39 0 11 0

F 2 4 2 0 7 0
Sub Total 15 11 41 0 18 0

15 | P a g e
 Total 85

6.2.2 Laboratory Facilities

S. No Name of Laboratory Quantity

1) Fundamental of Electrical Engineering Lab 1

2) Electronics lab 1
3) Communication Systems lab 1
4) Antenna Lab 1

5) DSP Lab 1
6) Power Systems lab 1
7) Microprocessor and Interfacing lab 1
8) Control Systems lab 1
9) Instrumentation lab 1
10) Electrical Machines lab 1
11) Power Electronics and Electrical Drive Lab 1
12) Electrical Workshop lab 1

13) Postgraduate lab 1

14) Process control and Automation 1

15) Final Year Project Room 1

6.3 Tools

The main tools of the teaching-learning process are black boards, white boards, over-head projectors, LCD
projectors, audio-visual equipment, and ICT related peripherals and software. Most of the lectures
requiring graphical display of constructional features in minute detail shall be conducted using LCD
projectors. Animation is to be employed where applicable for better impact and visualization. Text books
and references are available in the Technology Faculty library. A computer center of the department having
a modest number of computers is available for any problem solving that requires computers. A design room
with 40 computers and the requisite software shall be established during implementation.

6.4 Skills to be developed

Due emphasis would be given in the teaching-learning process, not only towards the building of technical
and professional core competencies but also for imparting and developing the following:
▪ Practical problem solving skills,
▪ Analytical and modeling skills,
▪ Computer-related skills

16 | P a g e
 ▪ Reasoning skills,
▪ Fault diagnosis-repair and maintenance skills,
▪ Innovative product design and development skills,
▪ Drafting skills
▪ Reporting /Communication skills
▪ Managerial/Organizational skills
▪ Behavioral and interpersonal skills

6.5 Addressing Learning Needs of All Students

An objective of education should be to help students build their skills in both their preferred and less
preferred modes of learning. Learning style models that categorize these modes provide good frame works
for designing instruction in engineering education with the desired breadth. Four different learning style
models like;
▪ The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI),
▪ Kolb’s Learning Style Model (KLSM),
▪ Herrmann Brain Dominance Instrument (HBDI) and
▪ Felder-Silverman Learning Style Model (FSLM) has been used effectively in engineering
education in this regard.

A learning style model is useful if balancing instruction on each of the model dimensions meets the
learning needs of essentially all students in a class.

6.6 Strategies

Instructors could greatly improve engineering instruction by increasing the use of methods oriented toward
active learners (participatory activities, field related assignment works, team projects), sensing learners
(guided practice, real-world applications of fundamental material), and global learners (providing the big
picture, showing connections to related material in other courses and to the students’ experience). It is
noted that presenting facts and familiar phenomena first and then to theories and mathematical models
rather than always using the “fundamentals, then applications” approach makes it much more effective.

Greater emphasis on active learning experiences in class, replacing formula substitution problems with
open-ended questions and problem formulation exercises, usage of extensive cooperative learning and to
get the students to teach one another rather than rely exclusively on the instructor can lead to improved
student learning, satisfaction with their instruction as well as self confidence that can do wonders to their
morale.

6.7 Interactive Blended e-learning

The more the learner gets involved in the learning process, the better he will be able to absorb, process and
retain the information and make use of it in concrete situations. In the active mode of knowledge and
competence construction, the learner is supported by the teacher- and also by means of targeted and
structured technical impulses The knowledge has a generally higher relevance as regards the

17 | P a g e
implementation in practice- the transfer turns out to be easier and the learner experiences learning as a
process that he himself can control and steer in steps. In this context, the potential of blended e-learning
(integration of traditional and e-learning) can be exploited and hence is to be practiced, to the extent
possible, by the use of media and a Learning Management System (LMS). This can be done by supporting
the students to acquire learning contents themselves and by assisting them as a mentor –not only in
situations of physical presence in the class room, but also outside the class room in the computer lab using
the University’s own intranet or may be in the internet or even in a field setting. A teacher can develop
new and more interactive learning methods through the use of LMS and e-learning platforms, depending
on the scope and content of his own specific subjects. Concerted efforts would be made by one and all
concerned for its implementation

6.8 Project-Based Learning

Through these project study courses, the learner’s initiatives are expected to be developed for use in the
world of work. Students would be required to identify the actual problems during the course of their
industrial internship, analyze them exhaustively for proposing and developing viable solutions for their
ultimate implementation. This exercise is meant give the much needed boost to augment their real life
problem solving skills desperately needed in the present local context. The scope of these project studies
would be so formulated as to create avenues for the learner to realize his innate creative potential through
self-learning and testing, either in physical or virtual reality as may be applicable.

In the end, learners would acquire the confidence of practicing what they have learnt. This can act as
stepping stone for him to attempt and launch developmental endeavors in the long run.

6.9 Participatory Learning

The learning activities would be extended in to the local communities for making the education not only
learner-centered but also participatory in nature. Teachers, students, community, governmental and non-
governmental /developmental organizations would all be involved as stakeholders to empower people and
affect development in real terms. Students would be required to identify problems affecting assigned
communities, prioritize them for development of action plans and for implementation and evaluation,
adopting all the while an interdisciplinary approach. Apart from honing their application and problem
solving skills, this would also enable the students to imbibe a sense of professional commitment to mitigate
the suffering of their fellow citizens, while using technology as a driving force for development. The whole
exercise is meant to integrate educational training, research and service, both for achieving professional
relevance as well as to carry forward the task of development in the local context

18 | P a g e
7. Assessment and Quality Assurance

7.1 Examination System

At the end of each semester, the student sits for final examinations of the courses he/she has attended
(minimum 80% for lectures and tutorials, 100% for practical exercises). A student must pass the
examinations for all the courses.

Most courses will be assessed by a combination of written and oral examinations. Reports on project work
should also be part and parcel of the assessment metrics. The design activities shall be assessed entirely by
course work and this often shall include assessment of oral presentations.

According to the revised curriculum, in addition to regular quizzes, home works, and assignments, the
students will undertake one major exam for most courses at the end of each semester (Final Exam). Some
senior courses may not have Mid-term Exams; instead students will be evaluated based on project work.
In the final year, students should be required to present and defend their B.Sc. thesis work in front of
examining professors and interested audience.
Examination Pass-Fail Pathways
Pass Grade ➔ Ok
Pass Grade ➔ OK
Fail Grade ➔ Re-take course or
F failed part of course
Pass Grade ➔ OK
Pass Grade ➔ OK
Fail Grade F ➔ End of study
Fail Grade F ➔ End of study

7.2 Grading System

Course Grade ECTS Grade
Class
Corresponding fixed Designation Class
Exam Score Grade Description
number grade
[90,100] A+ 4.00 Very Great
[85,90) A 4.00 Excellent Distinction
[80,85) A- 3.75 Great First
Distinction Class
[75,80) B+ 3.50 Very Good Distinction
[70,75) B 3.00
[65,70) B- 2.75 Good
[60,65) C+ 2.50 Second
[50,60) C 2.00 Satisfactory class
[45,50) C- 1.75 Unsatisfactory
[40,45) D 1.00 Very poor

19 | P a g e
 <40 F 0 Lower
class
Explanations:

1) A student who passed (i.e. ECTS grades A – D) cannot re-take an examination in order to improve
his/her grade.
2) A student who failed with grade ‘F’ needs to re-take the entire course at the next opportunity it is
offered. If, in the following examination he/she fails again with grade ‘F’ he/she will not be awarded
any ECTS credits for that course. Special cases will be decided upon by the Institute’s Academic
Council. The Institute’s Academic Council can make exceptions to this rule, taking into consideration
individual circumstances and merits of the student. The decision of the Institute’s Academic Council
should be unanimous. If such decision cannot be reached after two consecutive meetings, the
chairperson of the council (Scientific Director of the Institute) makes the final and binding decision.

If the grade of a single course is a product of several parts (e.g. written exam, assignment reports,
presentation) that are evaluated individually (refer to respective course description), the entire course is
considered failed if the student fails any of the individually assessed parts, even if the overall average of
all parts would result into a pass mark. In such a case, only the part of the examination which was failed
needs to be repeated according to the rules and procedures for repeating failed examinations.

For examinations evaluated by an examination committee, the arithmetic mean of the percentage points
awarded by each examination committee member, rounded to the nearest higher number, will be used as
the basis of determining the grade.

7.3 Quality Assurance Management

Quality assurance can be used as an instrument to improve the system continuously, install accountability
and enable compatibility with other higher education systems. The quality of the program is assessed in
terms of the instruction performance and impact of program on the quality of graduates looking for a job
or further studies. The following factors help to ensure the quality of the education:
▪ In order to maintain the level of courses, course description are prepared in detail containing course
objectives, learning outcome, course outline, textbooks, references and laboratory tasks.
▪ With regard to instruction performance, in line with the University policy, student evaluations are
taken into account. The feedbacks from the students are used to improve the quality of instruction.
▪ Examinations are assessed by Faculty Examination Committee to verify the level of the courses
instruction.
▪ Industry feedback will be an integral part of the process of quality assurance. The quality of
graduates is measured with the feedback obtained from the employers and stakeholders who are
the immediate beneficiaries of the program and also the graduates who are able to rate their own
confidence in meeting the challenges they encounter after graduation.
▪ Alumni contacts will be established to find out feedbacks how successful the education they had
at the faculty has actually been helpful and what actions to take for further improvement on the
study program.
20 | P a g e
 7.4 Credit Transfer System
The conventional credit system used in higher education systems is mainly based on student contact hours
in class and laboratory sessions. European Credit Transfer System of credit system is introduced that takes
the extra hours a student spends for the course in addition to lectures, tutorials, and laboratory practical. In
ECTS credits are values, allocated to course units, to describe the student workload required to complete a
course including attending lectures, seminars, independent and private study, preparation of projects and
examinations.

In this revised curriculum, the ECTS equivalent of the old credit system has been estimated
and shown for each course in the course breakdown. In ECTS, one credit stands for 25-30
hours of work activity. A semester study within this system is set at 30-35 ECTS points (750-900
hours).

8. Modules and Courses

8.1. Modules
8.1.1. Module Coding
The four-digit module (ECEGM1234) numbering system allows one to identify:

• The Module Offering – in this case ECEG - the Faculty of Electrical & Computer
Engineering,
• The Year along the program in which the module if offered by the departments, (in case where
module extends over two different years, the year in which the module is begin is taken in to
consideration)
• The module (the middle two digits indicate the module number
• The category of the courses in the module

8.1.2. Module Coding and Lists of Courses in Modules

Modu
Course Course Module
le Module Title Courses
Codes ECTS ECTS
No.
FLEn1011 Communicative English Language Skill I 5
FLEn1012 Communicative English Language Skill II 5
CESt1011 Moral and Citizenship Education 5
Phil1011 Logic and Critical Thinking 5
Humanity and
01 Psyl1012 General Psychology 5 41
Social Science
SpSc1011 Physical Fitness 2
Anth1012 Social Anthropology 4
Hist1012 History of Ethiopia and the Horn 5
GeEs1011 Geography of Ethiopia and the Horn 5
Industrial Management and Engineering 3
Management and MEng5021
02 Economics 11
Entrepreneurship Econ2021 Economics 5

21 | P a g e
 ECEG5021 Engineering Entrepreneurship 3
EmTe1012 Introduction to Emerging Technologies 5
GEng2031 Introduction to philosophy of science and 5
General Engineering
03 Phys1031 General Physics 5 25
Engineering Skill
ECEG2032 Applied Modern Physics 5
Meng20321 Engineering Drawing 5

Math1011 Mathematics for Natural Sciences 5

Mathematics Math1042 Applied Mathematics I 5
22
04 Math2041 Applied Mathematics II 7
ECEG2042 Engineering Mathematics 5
Engineering CEng20721 Engineering Mechanics I (Statics) 5

05 Mechanics Meng2052 Engineering Mechanics II (Dynamics) 5 15

Engineering Thermodynamics and 5
MEng3052
Industrial Pneumatics Hydraulics
Fundamentals of ECEG2062 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering 5
Electrical ECEG2064 Electrical Engineering Laboratory I 3
Engineering ECEG2061 Probability and Random Process 5
06 ECEG3061 Electromagnetic Fields 5
25
ECEG3061 Electrical Material and Technology 5
ECEG2066 Electrical Workshop Practice I 3

ECEG3071 Applied Electronics I 5

Applied ECEG2073 Electrical Engineering Laboratory II 3 16

07 Electronics ECEG3072 Applied Electronics II 5

ECEG3074 Electrical Engineering Laboratory III 3
Signal Processing ECEG3081 Signals and Systems Analysis 5
08 and Analysis ECEG3082 Network Analysis and Synthesis 5 15
ECEG4081 Digital Signal Processing 5
Programming and ECEG1092 Computer Programming 5
Computer ECEG2092 Object Oriented Programming 5 15

09 Architecture ECEG3091 Computational Methods 5

ECEG3092 Digital Logic Design 5
ECEG4091 Computer Architecture and Organization 5
Electrical ECEG4101 Introduction to Communication Systems 5
Systems ECEG4103 Introduction to Control Systems 5
10 Engineering ECEG4105 Introduction to Power systems 5
ECEG4107 Electrical Engineering Laboratory V 5 25
ECEG4109 Introduction to Instrumentation 5

22 | P a g e
 11 Basic Electrical ECEG3112 Introduction to Electrical Machines 5
Machines ECEG3114 Electrical Engineering Laboratory IV 3
ECEG3116 Electrical Workshop Practice II 4 12

Focus area Modules for Year IV and Year V

1. Communication Engineering

Module Course Course Module

Module Title Courses
Number Codes ECTS ECTS
Communication Communication Systems ECEG4122 5
12 System 15
Optics and Optical Communication ECEG5122 5

Data and Telecommunication Networks ECEG5132

5
13 Telecom
10
Network Wireless and Mobile Communication ECEG5130 5
EM Waves and Guide Structures ECEG4142 5
RF Waves,
Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation ECEG4146 5
14 Antenna and
Microwave Devices and Systems ECEG5141 5 15
Microelectronics
Microelectronic Devices and Circuits ECEG4144 5
2. Computer Engineering

Module Course Course Module

Module Title Courses
Number Codes ECTS ECTS
Microcomputer and Interfacing ECEG4152 5
Microcomputer
15 Embedded Systems ECEG5151 5 14
Interfacing and VLSI
VLSI Design ECEG5152 4
Data Structures ECEG4162 5
16 Data Storage
Database System ECEG5162 5 10
Programming Concepts Operating Systems ECEG5172 5
& Software Introduction to Compiler ECEG5171 5
17
Engineering Software Engineering ECEG4172 5 20
Algorithm Analysis and Design ECEG5172 5
Data Communication and ECEG4182 5
Computer
Computer Networks
18 Networks and
Computer and Network Security ECEG4184 5 10
Security

3. Industrial Control Engineering

23 | P a g e
 Module Course Course Module
Module Title Courses
Number Codes ECTS ECTS
Modern Control systems ECEG4192 5
Power Electronics and Electric Drives ECEG5195 5
Digital Control Systems ECEG5194 5 25
Control Systems and
Instrumentation Engineering ECEG5192 5
19 Instrumentation
Biomedical Instrumentation and ECEG5193
Engineering
Analysis
Neural Networks & Fuzzy Logic ECEG5191 5
Control
Introduction to Robotics ECEG5204 5
Control ECEG4202
Industrial Automation
20 Applications and 10
Process Control Fundamentals ECEG5202 5
Automation

4. Electrical Power Engineering

Module Course Course Module

Module Title Courses
Number Codes ECTS ECTS

Power System Power Systems ECEG4210 5

Protection, Power System ECEG5212

21 5
Operation and Operation and Control 15
Control Power System Protection ECEG5212 5

Energy Electrical Installation ECEG4224 5

Conversion Energy Conversion and Rural Electrification ECEG5220 5
22 15
and distribution Electrical Machines ECEG4222 5
Electrical Power Power System Planning and Management ECEG5231 5
Systems Planning Introduction to Power System Automation ECEG5232
23
and Management 5 10

5. Internship, Research Method, and Thesis Module

Module Course Course Module

Module Title Courses
Number Codes ECTS ECTS
Research Methods and ECEG4272 3
Presentation
Internship, Semester Project ECEG5271 4
19
27 Project and Exit Industry Internship ECEG5271 P/F
exam ECEG5272 12
BSc Thesis

NEE5202 -
Exit Exam

24 | P a g e
 8.2. Course

8.2.1. Course Coding

The four-digit course (ECEG 1234) numbering system allows one to identify:

The Course Offering Department – in this case ECEG - the Faculty of Electrical &
Computer Engineering,

• The Year along the program in which the course if offered by the department
• The module (the middle two digits indicate the module number the course belongs to)
• The sequence of courses in a module
• Common courses in the stream are given the same course coding depending on the stream
it belongs to Exceptions to this coding are SpSc, Econ, Phil, CvEt, EnLa, EnLa, EnLa
service courses from Social Sciences; Mathematics courses Math and other Engineering
Courses offered by other Engineering departments CEng (Statics), MEng (Engineering
Drawing), MEng (Dynamics), and MEng (Engineering Thermodynamics). The numbering
given by the course owner departments concerned for such courses have been kept as they
are.

8.2.2. Semester Breakdown

Core Electrical and Computer Engineering
First Year, First semester
S/N Course Course Title Pre- ECTS Cr. Lec. Tut. Lab Home
Code Requisites Hr. Study
1) CESt1011 Moral and Citizenship Education - 5 3 2 3 - 5
2) FLEn1011 Communicative English Language Skill I - 5 3 2 3 - 5
3) GeEs1011 Geography of Ethiopia and the Horn - 5 3 2 3 - 5
4) Math1011 Mathematics for Natural Sciences - 5 3 2 3 - 5
5) Phil1011 Logical and Critical Thinking - 5 3 2 3 - 4
6) Phys1011 General Physics 5 2 2 3 - 5
7) SpSc1011 Physical Fitness - 2 1 2 - - -
Total Credit 32 18 14 18 - 29

First Year, Second Semester

Course Pre- Cr. Home

S/N Course Title Requisites ECTS Hr. Lec Tut Lab
Code Study
1) Anth1012 Social Anthropology - 4 2 2 2 - 4
2) EmTe1012 Introduction to Emerging - 5 3 2 3 - 5
Technologies
3) FLEn1012 Communicative English FLEn1011 3
Language Skill II 5 2 3 - 5

25 | P a g e
 4) Hist1012 History of Ethiopia and the horn - 5 3 2 3 - 5
5) Psyl1012 General Psychology - 5 3 2 3 - 5
6) ECEG1092 Computer programming - 5 3 2 0 3 5
7) Math1042 Applied Mathematics I Math1011 5 3 2 3 - 5
Total 34 20 14 17 3 34
Second Year - First Semester
Course Pre-Requisite Cr. Home
S/N Course Title ECTS Lec Tut Lab
Code Hr. Study
1) MEng20321 Engineering Drawing - 5 3 2 3 - 6
CEng20721 Engineering Mechanics - 5 3
2) 0 0 3 2
I (Statics)
GEng2031 Introduction to - 5 3
3) philosophy of science 2 3 - 3
and Engineering
4) Math2041 Applied Mathematics II Math1042 7 4 3 2 - 5
5) Fundamentals of ECEG2042
ECEG2062 (Co-requisite) 5 3 2 3 - 5
Electrical Engineering
6) ECEG2064 Electrical Engineering - 1
3 - - 3 4
Laboratory I
Total 30 17 9 11 6 25
Second Year - Second Semester
S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home
Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Requisite Hr. Study
1) Probability and Random Math1042 5 3
ECEG2061 2 3 - 3
Process
2) Econ2021 Economics - 5 3 2 3 - 3
3) ECEG2032 Applied Modern Physics Phys1011 5 3 2 3 - 5
4) ECEG2092 Object Oriented Programming ECEG1052 5 3 2 - 3 5
5) ECEG2042 Engineering Mathematics Math2041 5 3 2 3 - 5
6) Meng2052 Engineering Mechanics II CEng20711 5 3 2 3 - 5
(Dynamics)
7) ECEG2066 Electrical Workshop Practice I - 3
3 - - 3
1
Total 33 19 12 15 6 29
Third Year, First Semester
S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home
Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Requisite Hr. Study
1. ECEG3091 Computational Methods c 5 3 2 - 3 3
2. ECEG3071 Applied Electronics I 5 3 3 3 - 5
3. Electrical Engineering Laboratory 1
ECEG3073 3 - - 3 3
II
4. ECEG3061 Electromagnetic Field 5 3 2 3 - 5
5. ECEG3081 Signals and System Analysis g 5 3 3 3 - 5
6. ECEG3061 Electrical Material and Technology 5 3 2 3 - 5
7. Engineering Thermodynamics and 3
MEng3052 5 2 2 2 2
Industrial Pneumatics Hydraulics

26 | P a g e
 32 18 14 14 6 28
Third Year, Second Semester
S/N Pre- Cr.
Course Home
Course Title Requisi ECTS Hr. Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Study
te
1. ECEG3082 Network Analysis and Synthesis c 5 3 2 3 - 5
2. ECEG3092 Digital Logic Design 6 4 2 2 2 6
3. Introduction to Electrical 3
ECEG3112 5 2 3 - 5
Machines
4. Electrical Engineering 1
ECEG3114 3 - - 3 3
Laboratory IV
5. ECEG3116 Electrical Workshop Practice II g 4 2 2 - 4 4
6. ECEG3072 Applied Electronics II 5 3 3 3 - 5
7. Electrical Engineering 1
ECEG3074 3 - - 3 3
Laboratory III
Total 31 18 12 13 9 29
Fourth Year, First Semester
S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home
Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Requisite Hr. Study
1. Computer Architecture and 3
ECEG4091 5 2 3 - 5
Organization
2. Introduction to Communication 3
ECEG4101 5 2 3 3 5
Systems
3. ECEG4081 Digital Signal Processing 5 3 2 2 3 5
4. ECEG4103 Introduction to Control Systems 5 3 2 3 - 5
5. ECEG4105 Introduction to Power Systems 5 3 2 3 - 5
6. Electrical Engineering 1
ECEG4107 3 - - 4 2
Laboratory V
7. ECEG4109 Introduction to Instrumentation 5 3 2 2 3 5
Total 33 19 12 16 16 32

Communication Engineering
Fourth Year, Second Semester

S/N Course Cr. Home

Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Hr. Study
1. ECEG42702 Research Methods and Presentation 3 2 2 1 - 3
2. ECEG4122 Communication Systems (Digital) 5 3 2 3 - 5
3. Data Communication and Computer 3
ECEG4182 5 2 - 3 5
Networks
4. ECEG4152 Microcomputers and Interfacing 5 3 2 1 2 5
5. ECEG4142 EM Waves and Guide Structures 5 3 2 3 - 5
6. ECEG4144 Microelectronic Devices and Circuits 5 3 2 1 2 5
7. ECEG4142 Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation 5 3 2 3 - 5
Total 33 20 14 12 7 33

Fifth Year, First Semester

27 | P a g e
 S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home
Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Requisite Hr. Study
1. ECEG5151 Embedded Systems 5 3 2 1 5
2. Industrial Management and 3
MEng5021 5 2 3 - 5
Engineering Economy
3. Telecommunication and 3
ECEG5141 5 3 2 - 5
Switching Networks
4. ECEG5021 Engineering Entrepreneurship 5 3 3 2 - 4
5. ECEG5271 Semester Project 4 2 - - 5 4
Total 24 11 11 9 6 23
Fifth Year - Second Semester

S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home

Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Requisite Hr. Study
1. ECEG5272 BSc Thesis 12 7 - - 18 7
2. ECEG5142 Microwave Devices and Systems 5 3 2 3 - 5
3. Wireless and Mobile 3
ECEG5132 5 2 3 - 5
Communication
4. ECEG5122 Optics and Optical Communication 5 3 2 3 - 5
5. NEE5202 Exit Exam P/F - - - - -
Total 27 16 6 9 6 40

Computer Engineering
Fourth Year, Second Semester
S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home
Course Title Requisite ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Hr. Study
1. ECEG4152 Microcomputers and Interfacing 5 3 2 1 2 5
2. ECEG4162 Data Structures 5 3 2 1 2 5
3. ECEG4172 Software Engineering 5 3 2 3 - 5
4. 3
ECEG4182 Computer and Network Security 5 2 2 1 5
5. Research Methods and 2
3 2 1 - 3
ECEG4272 Presentation
6. ECEG4184 Data Communication and 5 3 2 - 3 5
Computer Networks
7. ECEG4202 Industrial Automation 5 3 2 1 2 5
Total 33 20 14 9 9 33

Fourth year third semester (summer)

Course Code Course Title Pre-Requisite ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab Home Study

ECEG5271 Completion of all

Industry
previous P/F - - - 40
Internship
Semesters courses
Total Credit P/F - 40

Fifth Year, First Semester

28 | P a g e
S/N Course Pre-Requisite Cr. Home
Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Hr. Study
1) ECEG5151 Embedded Systems 5 3 3 2 1 2
2) ECEG5171 Introduction to Compiler 5 3 2 3 - 5
3) Industrial Management and 3
MEng5021 5 2 3 - 5
Engineering Economy
4) 3
ECEG5021 Engineering Entrepreneurship 5 3 2 - 4
5) 2
ECEG5271 Semester Project 4 2 - 5 4
Total 24 14 9 10 6 16

Fifth Year, Second Semester

S/N Course Pre- Cr.

Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab Home Study
Code Requisite Hr.
1)
ECEG5172 Operating Systems 5 2 3 - 5
2)
ECEG5174 Algorithms Analysis and Design 5 2 3 - 5
3)
ECEG5272 BSc Thesis 12 - - 18 7
4)
ECEG5204 Introduction to Robotics 4 2 1 1 5
5)
ECEG5162 Database Systems 5 2 2 1 5
6)
ECEG5152 VLSI Design 4 2 1 1 5
7) Exit Exam P/F - - - - 18
NEE5202
Total 35 10 10 8 29

Industrial Control Engineering

Fourth Year, Second Semester
S/ Course Pre- Cr. Home
N Course Title Request ECTS Hr. Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Study
1. ECEG4192 Modern Control Systems 5 3 2 1 2 5
2. ECEG4152 Microcomputers and Interfacing 5 3 2 1 2 5
3. ECEG4202 Industrial Automation 5 3 2 1 2 5
4. ECEG4222 Electrical Machines 5 3 2 1 2 5
5. ECEG4224 Electrical Installation 5 3 2 3 - 5
6. ECEG4272 Research Methods and Presentation 3 2 2 1 - 3
Total 28 17 12 8 8 28
Fourth year third semester (summer)

Course Code Course Title Pre-Requisite ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab Home Study

ECEG5271 Completion of all

Industry
previous P/F - - - 40
Internship
Semesters courses

29 | P a g e
 Total Credit P/F - 40

Fifth Year, First Semester

S/N Course Pre- Cr. Home

Course Title Requisite ECTS Hr. Lec. Tut. Lab Study
Code
1. ECEG5151 Embedded Systems 5 3 2 1 2 5
2. Industrial Management and Engineering 3
MEng5021 5 2 3 - 5
Economy
3. ECEG5021 Engineering Entrepreneurship 3 3 3 2 - 4
4. Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic 3
ECEG5191 4 2 1 2 5
Control
5. Biomedical Instrumentation and
ECEG5193 5 3 3 2 2 5
Analysis
6. ECEG5271 Semester Project 4 2 - - 5 4
7. ECEG5195 Power Electronics and Electrical Drives 5 3 2 1 2 3
Total 31 20 14 10 13 31
Fifth Year, Second Semester

S/N Cr. Home

Course Code Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab
Hr. Study
1. ECEG5192 Instrumentation Engineering 5 3 2 2 2 5
2. ECEG5194 Digital Control Systems 5 3 2 2 2 5
3. ECEG5272 BSc Thesis 12 7 - - 18 7
4. ECEG5202 Process Control Fundamentals 5 3 2 2 2 5
5. ECEG5204 Introduction to Robotics 5 3 2 3 - 5
6. NEE5202 Exit Exam P/F - - - - -
Total 32 19 8 9 24 27

Electrical Power Engineering

Fourth Year - Second Semester

Course Pre- Cr. Home

S/N Course Title Requisite ECTS Hr. Lec. Tut. Lab Study
Code
1. ECEG4222 Electrical Machines 5 3 2 3 - 5
2. ECEG4192 Modern Control Systems 5 3 2 1 2 5
3. ECEG4224 Electrical Installation 5 3 2 3 - 5
4. ECEG4212 Power Systems 5 3 2 2 1 5
5. ECEG4272 Research Methods and Presentation 3 2 2 - - 3
6. ECEG4152 Microcomputers and Interfacing 5 3 2 1 2 5
7. Power System Operation and 3
ECEG4214 5 2 3 - 5
Control
Total 33 20 14 13 5 31

Fourth year third semester (summer)

30 | P a g e
Course Code Course Title Pre-Requisite ECTS Lec. Tut. Lab Home Study

ECEG4271 Completion of all

Industry
previous P/F - - - 40
Internship
Semesters courses
Total Credit P/F - 40

Fifth Year, First Semester

S/N Course Cr. Home
Course Title Pre-Requisite ECTS Hr. Lec. Tut. Lab
Code Study
1. Power Electronics and Electrical 3
ECEG5195 5 2 1 2 3
Drives
2. ECEG5021 Engineering Entrepreneurship 5 3 3 2 - 4
3. Industrial Management and 3
MEng5021 5 2 3 - 5
Engineering Economy
4. Power System Planning & 3
ECEG5231 5 2 3 - 5
Management
5. ECEG5271 Semester Project 4 2 - - 5 4

Total 24 14 8 9 7 21
Fifth Year, Second Semester
Course Cr. Home
S/N Course Title ECTS Lec. Tut Lab
Code Hr. Study
1. Energy Conversion and Rural
ECEG5222 5 3 2 3 - 5
Electrification
2. ECEG5212 Power System Protection 5 3 2 3 2 5
3. ECEG5272 BSc Thesis 12 7 - - 5 7
4.
5. Introduction to Power System
ECEG5232 5 3 2 - 3 3
Automation
6. Exit Exam 18
Total 32 8 10 9 25

8.3. Course Description and Syllabus

8.3.1. Moral and Civics Education

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code MCiE1012
Course Title Moral and Civics Education
Degree Program
Module Name

31 | P a g e
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credit 4
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home Study
Laboratory
48 - 48
Course Objective
This course is designed for undergraduate students with the aim of producing good
citizens.

It emphasizes on equipping learners with the necessary civic competence and active
participation in public life. It will also help them to exercise their democratic rights
and discharging their responsibilities effectively by familiarizing them with
necessary civic knowledge and skills.

In countries such as ours, where the process of cultivating modern constitutional and
democratic values in the minds of citizens is experiencing serious challenges, largely
because the country had no established civic culture and partly because these values
and principles are not yet well-institutionalized, civics and ethical education remains
to be imperative.

To this end, the course introduces learners to the basics of civics and ethics,
citizenship, morality and the goals of studying civics and ethics. It exposes students
to the meanings, foundations, approaches, values and principles of ethics and civic
virtue that learners must be equipped with both as citizens and professionals in their
encounter with real life situations both to be morally matured and responsible while
making decisions and taking actions.

The course also elucidates the nature, purpose and forms of state and government,
constitution, democracy and human rights, the nature of democratic citizenship,
modes of cultivating civic-virtues in our citizens mainly within the context of
Ethiopia.

Ethiopia is currently going through a twin process of hope and despair. On the one
hand there are tremendous social, economic and political changes.

On the other hand, significant challenges are affecting the process, the pace and
magnitude of this change. For such changes to be successful however, it is imperative
that citizens develop rational thinking, critical support and reasonable opposition to
the growing culture of mob mentality.

Moreover, citizens also need to go beyond their narrow individual interests and
prioritize broad national interests.

32 | P a g e
 The prevalence of corruption, which has been spreading like a wild fire is also
frustrating the productive capacities of citizens that could positively contribute to the
development of the country.

All the aforementioned national concerns have largely been overlooked by the
common course syllabi currently under construction. Such glaring absence of
citizenship and moral education from the curriculum could be considered as one of
the gaps that need to be urgently addressed. In this regard, by encouraging civil
discourse on contending national issues, prioritizing peace and inculcating honorable
disposition, the course civic and ethical studies would prepare students to contribute
to the overall peace, stability and prosperity of the nation at large, hence magnifying
the relevance and urgency of this course.

Learning outcomes Upon a successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
• Understand the subject matter of Civics and Ethics;
• Cultivate certain moral values and civic virtues that enable them to be
morally matured and competent in their professional and citizenry lives by
practically exposing them to moral and civic debates/discussions and
engagements.
• Develop such values/ virtues as recognition, appreciation and tolerance
towards diversity and also build culture of peace
• Gain knowledge about the theoretical discourses and practices of state,
government and citizenship, and their mutual interplay especially in the
context of Ethiopia;
• Develop individual and/or collective potential of becoming self-confident
citizens who can effectively participate in their legal-political, socio-
economic and cultural lives
• Understand the essences of such values and principles as democracy and
human rights, multiculturalism and constitution and constitutionalism with
especial reference to Ethiopia;
• Develop analytical and reflective skill of identifying global or national level
development, democracy/governance and peace related issues of civics and
ethics and then be able to produce or evaluate policies and practices in a
civically and ethically responsible manner.
Course Description
Week C. Course Contents
hour
1. Understanding Civics and Ethics: Defining Civics, Ethics, Morality and
amorality; The Origin and Development of Civics and ethical education; The
purpose of civics and ethical education; Citizen: Rights and responsibilities;
Competences of good citizen

33 | P a g e
 2. Approaches to Ethics: Normative ethics, Teleological Ethics
(Consequentialist); Hedonism; Ethical and psychological Egoism:
Epicureanism and Cyrenaicism; Social Hedonism: Utilitarianism, Deontological
Ethics (Non- Consequentialist); Performance of One’s own Duty; Devine-based
Morality; Kant’s Categorical Imperative; W.D. Ross’s Prima Facie duty, Virtue
Ethics and Civic Virtues; Basic Principles of Civic Virtues; How to be virtuous
person? Non-Normative Ethics; Meta Ethics; Absolutism/Objectivism;
Relativism/Subjectivism and Conventionalism; Naturalism and Non-naturalism,
Issues in Applied Ethics, Development Ethics; How should a society Develop?
Who is morally responsible for Underdevelopment? A‘Just’ Development,
Environmental Ethics; Ecosystem and the environmental pollutions; Principles
of Environmental Ethics, Professional Ethics; Profession and Professionalism;
The scope of Professional Ethics; Common Principles of Professional Ethics
3. Ethical Decision Making and Moral Judgments: Ethical Principles and
Values of Moral Judgments, the principle of equal consideration of interest,
conflicting goals and ethical Justifications, Ethical values and Justifiable
exceptions; Why Should I act ethically?
4. State, Government and Citizenship: Understanding State, what is a state?
Attributes of State, State Structures; Understanding Government, Major
Function and Purpose of Government, Types of Government: Limited and
Unlimited, Systems of Government; Understanding
Citizenship, what is Citizenship, Inclusion and exclusion in Citizenship, Ways
of Acquiring Citizenship, Ways of Losing Citizenship, Citizenship in Ethiopian
Context: Past and Present; State Formation and Nation-building in Ethiopian
Context
5. Constitution, Democracy and Human Rights: Constitution and
Constitutionalism, Peculiar features of Constitution, Major Purpose and
Functions of Constitution, Classification of Constitutions, The Constitutional
Experience of Ethiopia: pre and post 1931; Democracy and Democratization,
Definitions and Forms of Democracy, Views on Democracy: Substantive and
Procedural Views, Fundamental Values and Principles of Democracy,
Democratization and Its Waves, Major actors in Democratization Process,
Democracy and Good Governance
in Ethiopia; Human Rights, Definitions and Nature of Human Rights, Basic
Characteristics of Human Rights, Dimensions of Human Rights, The Protection
and Promotion of Human Rights,
Human Rights Instruments: Documents, Oversight Mechanisms: Institutions
Pre-requisites none
Co-requisite

34 | P a g e
Target group/Semester 1/I
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning Lectures
Methods
Assessment/ Evaluation Assignments 20%, Test 30%, Final 50 %
& Grading System
Course Policy • All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
• Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
• Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
• You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the time table indicated.
• 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I will
not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
• Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Literature 1. Alexander, Larry (eds.). (1998). Constitutionalism: Philosophical Foundations.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
2. Assefa Fisseha. (2006). Federalism and Accommodation of Ethnic Diversity in
Ethiopia: Comparative Study. Utrecht: Wolf Legal Publishers.
3. Charles F. Kettering Foundation. & Harwood Group.1991. Citizens and politics:
a view from Main Street America. Dayton, Ohio: The Foundation.
4. David S. Oderberg and Timothy Chapel. (2004). Human values, new essays on
ethics and natural law palgrave mac millan, Great Britain.
5. Fasil Nahum. 1997. Constitution for a Nation of Nations: The Ethiopian
Prospect. Lawrence ville, NJ: Red Sea Publishers.
6. FDRE. (1995). The Constitution of the Federal Democratic of Ethiopia. Federal
NegarritGazeta: Addis Abeba
7. Francis Snare (1992). The Nature of Moral Thinking. Rutledge, U.S.A and
Canada
Approved By:
________________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

35 | P a g e
 8.3.2. Communicative English Skills I
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code FLEn1011
Course Title Communicative English Skills I
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 48
Course Objectives • The course is designed to enable students to communicate in English
intelligibly with acceptable accuracy, fluency and ability to use English
appropriately in different contexts.
• The course exposes students to English language learning activities designed
to help students use English for their academic and social needs.
• Students would be engaged in language learning development activities
through doing and reflection on action. This includes grammar and
vocabulary as used in communicative events and all skills and their
sub-kills: speaking, listening, reading and writing.
• The language and skills are integrated where one becomes a resource to the
other. There are six units covering topics related to the life world of
students as well as of societal relevance.
Competences to be At the end of this course, students will be able to:
Acquired • Express themselves in social and academic events in English--Use English
intelligibly with reasonable level of curacy and fluency
• Listen and comprehend to talks related to social and academic events given
in English
• Read and understand texts written in English –texts on academic and social
matters
• Write in English as academically and socially desirable.
• Learn and develop their English on their own—learning to learn: the
language and the skills
Learning outcomes

36 | P a g e
Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

2 10 Introducing Oneself:

Listening, introducing oneself (who you are, where you came from, where you
finished your primary and secondary Faculty), what you intend to study and why?

Reading, reading a short biography written in simple English: using background

knowledge, reading with comprehension, making notes while reading, guessing
meanings, attending to reference words & discussing notes: Reading a short
deductive essay: taking notes while reading, discussing notes, guessing meaning
while reading, identifying descriptive words,using descriptive words in sentence
writing

2 10 Study Skills:

Listening-listening to a talk on habits of successful students: reflecting on one’s

study skills, taking notes while listening, discussing notes, answering listening
comprehension questions, discussing answers; giving advice using tips from the
listening text: using the language of giving advice;

Reading-Reading an expository essay on study skills: reading with

comprehension, attending to new vocabulary, writing notes while reading, writing
brief summaries from notes; studying the present perfect tense and the past perfect
tense: form, use and meaning of conditionals

4 20 Sports and Health:

Listening -Listening about Zinedine Zidan (who he is, his childhood, his
professional career): using prior knowledge (talking about a famous football player),
predicting what comes next and checking prediction, taking notes while listening,
discussing notes, presenting oral summary), asking and answering Wh-questions,
studying conditionals (form, use and meaning);

Reading-Reading a short expository passage on sports and health: discussing how

sports improve health, reading for main ideas, making notes while reading,
developing notes into short summaries, comparing summaries, Working on
vocabulary: using word formation;

37 | P a g e
3 15 Cultural Values: Listening -Listening about cultural tourism: discussing how
culture attracts tourists, listening with comprehension, taking notes while listening,
discussing notes, developing notes into one-paragraph summaries;

Reading-Reading an expository text on cultural values: reading with comprehension,

writing notes while reading, answering comprehension questions, summarizing the
text based on notes made while reading, discussing summaries; Revision simple
present, simple past, present perfect and past perfect tenses: revising form, use and
meanings of these tenses, writing short meaningful sentences using simple present,
simple past, present perfect and past perfect forms of verbs

2 10 Tourism and Wildlife:

Listening -Listening about human-wildlife conflict (argumentative text): using prior

knowledge, listening with comprehension, making notes while reading,
writing summaries using the notes, discussing the summaries; Reading -Reading a
text on tourism and wildlife: using visual, reading with comprehension, guessing
meanings of words based on context, writing brief notes while reading, discussing
notes and developing them into summaries, discussing summaries; Working on
denotative and connotative meanings; Revising conditionals: constructing
meaningful sentences based on pictures

3 15 Population:

Listening-Listening about population density: learning the meanings of

‘population’, ‘density’ and ‘population density’, predicting what comes in the talk
and checking prediction, listening with comprehension, taking notes while listening,
discussing notes, writing short paragraphs using the notes and discussing them;

Reading -Reading a text on population pyramid: interpreting tables, graphs and pie
charts, reading with comprehension, making notes while reading, discussing notes,
developing notes into paragraphs, discussing and improving paragraphs; Studying
collocation: learning the definition of collocation, identifying words that collocate
with ‘population’, doing exercise on collection, using collection in vocabulary study;
Working on active and passive constructions (form, use, meaning): noticing grammar
pattern in example sentences, listening to a brief lecture, writing
lectures notes, discussing notes, identifying active and passive constructions,
completing contextualized exercise, reading independently and compiling portfolio
on passive constructions

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

38 | P a g e
Year/Semester 1/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook

References • Alfassi, M. 2004. Reading to learn: Effects of combined strategy instruction

on high Faculty students. Journal of Educational Research, 97(4):171- 184.
• Anderson, N. 1999. Exploring second language reading: Issues and
strategies. Toronto: Heinle &Heinle Publisher.
• Bade, M. 2008. Grammar and good language learners. In C. Griffiths
(Eds.). Lessons from good language learners (pp. 174-184). Cambridge
University Press. https//doi.org/10.107/CBO9780511497667.016
• Bouchard, M. 2005. Reading comprehension strategies for English
language learners: research-based reading strategies that help students read,
understand and really learn content from their textbooks and other
nonfiction materials. New York: Scholastic.
• Cameron, L. 2001. Teaching languages to young learners. Cambridge:
Cambridge UniversityPress.
• Chamot, A.U. 1987. The learning strategies of ESL students. In A. Wenden
& J. Rubin (Eds.). Learner strategies in language learning (PP 71-85).
Prentice-Hall: Hemel Hempstead.

39 | P a g e
 • Gairns, R. & Redman, S. 1986. Working with words: A guide to teaching
and learning vocabulary. Cambridge University Press. Department of
Foreign Language and Literature. 1996. College English (Volume I and
Volume II). Addis Ababa University Press.
• McNamara, D.S. (Ed.). 2007. Reading comprehension strategies: Theories,
interventions, and technologies. New York: Erlbaum.
• Tilfarlioğlu, Y. 2005. An Analysis of the relationship between the use of
grammar learning strategies and student achievement at English preparatory
classes. Journal of Language and Linguistic Studies 1: 155-169.
• Murphy R. (?). Essentials of English grammar in use: A self-study
reference and practice book mfor intermediate students of English (2nd
Ed.). Cambridge University Press.
• Murphy R. 2004. English grammar in use: A self-study reference and
practice book for intermediate students of English (3rd Ed.). Cambridge
University Press.
• Zhang, L. J. 2008.Constructivist pedagogy in strategic reading instruction:
Exploring pathways to learner development in the English as a second
language (ESL) classroom. Instructional Science, 36(2): 89-
116.https://doi.org/10.1007/s11251-007-9025-6.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.3. Communicative English Skills II

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code FLEn1012
Course Title Communicative English Skills II
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 48

40 | P a g e
Course Objectives • This course mainly aims to provide first year University students proficiency
with reading, speaking and writing skills. It also aims to help students learn
vocabularies that are assumed unfamiliar to them. In the grammar part, with
the intention of providing explanations,
brief notes are given in each unit.
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

2 10 Life Skills: Reading passage (the concept of life skills); Grammar (Active and
passive voices);
Writing; Speaking
2 10 Speculations about the future of Science: Reading passage (Grassroots attack in
Bilharzia);
Grammar (Future tense); Writing; Speaking

4 20 Environmental protection: Reading passage: Environmental challenges (A river

run through it); Grammar (Modal verbs); Writing; Speaking

3 15 Indigenous Knowledge: Reading passage (A local pathway to global development);

Grammar (Reported speech); Writing; Speaking

2 10 Cultural Heritage: Reading passage (Cultural Heritage), What is it? Why is it

important? Grammar (Relative Clauses); Writing; Speaking

Supplementary Readings

A. Environmental Problems

B. The Origin of Humans: The Record from the Afar of Ethiopia

C. Tourism Can be Used to Preserve Ethiopia’s Cultural and Historic Wealth

Pre-requisites Communicative English Skills I

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/II

Status of Course Compulsory

41 | P a g e
Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial
Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook

References • Azar, B. S. (2003). Fundamentals of English grammar.

• Longman. Eggenschwiler, J., & Biggs, E.D. (2001). Writing: Grammar,
Usage, and Style. New York. Hungry Minds. Inc
• Lucy, J. A., & Lucy, L. A. (Eds.). (1993). Reflexive Language: Reported
Speech and Meta pragmatics. Cambridge University Press.
• Murphy, R. (2012). English Grammar in Use. Ernst Klett Sprachen.
• Naylor, H., & Murphy, R. (2007). Essential Grammar in Use.
Supplementary Exercises. With Answers. Ernst Klett Sprachen
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.4. Critical Thinking

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code LoCT1011
Course Title Critical Thinking

42 | P a g e
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 64
Course Objectives • Ethiopian is striving to guarantee sustainable development and good living
condition, where constant and consistent critical thinking plays an
irreplaceable role.
• The course is designed to understand the relationship of logic and
philosophy, recognize the core areas of philosophy, appreciate the necessity
learning logic and philosophy, understand basic logical concepts, arguments,
understand deductivness, inductiveness, validity, strength, soundness, and
cogency, develop the skill to construct sound argument and evaluate
arguments; cultivate the habits of critical thinking and develop sensitivity to
clear and accurate usage of language; differentiate cognitive meanings from
emotive meanings of words, differentiate standard forms of
categorical propositions from other types of sentences used in any language,
apply symbols to denote standard forms of categorical propositions to form
further logical assertions among them, develop logical and open-mind that
weighs ideas and people rationally; develop confidence when arguing with
others, demonstrate logical argumentative ability, develop logical reasoning
skill in their day to day life, and appreciate logical reasoning, disproving
mob-mentality and avoid social prejudice,; understand the basic concepts and
principles of critical thinking; understand the criterion of good argument;
identify the factors that affect critical thinking; apply critical thinking
principles to real life situation.
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes At the completion of the course, the student will have developed

• An understanding of the role logic plays in the reasoning process.

Specifically, the students are expected to achieve:
• The ability to recognize and analyze arguments in everyday language, to
detect hidden or implicit premises, and to extract the logical form of an
argument;

43 | P a g e
 • The ability to show the deductive validity or invalidity of an argument, to
recognize and criticize the flaws of a weak argument, and to develop
counterarguments;
• The ability to evaluate the strength of evidential support for scientific
hypotheses, especially causal hypotheses, in relatively simple cases; and
• The ability to present arguments cogently in speech and in writing

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

2 10 Logic and Philosophy: Introduction; Meaning and Definition of philosophy, Core
Branches of Philosophy, Importance of Learning Logic and Philosophy

2 10 Basic Concepts of Logic: Introduction; Basic Concepts of Logic; Techniques of

recognizing arguments; Types of Arguments, Deductive Arguments, Inductive
Arguments; Evaluation of Arguments, Evaluating Deductive Argument, Evaluating
Inductive Arguments

4 20 Logic and Language: Introduction; Logic and Meaning, Cognitive and Emotive
Meaning of Words, Intentional and Extensional Meaning of Terms, Logic and
Definition, Types and Purposes of Definition, Techniques of Definition, Extensional
Techniques of Definition, Intentional Techniques of Definition Comments, added
Comment, modified: Criteria for Lexical Definitions

3 15 Basic Concepts of Critical Thinking: Introduction; Meaning and Definition of

Critical Thinking; Principles of Critical Thinking; Criterion/Standard of Argument
Good Argument;Factors Affecting Critical Thinking; Relevance of Critical Thinking

2 10 Logical Reasoning and Fallacies: Induction; Types of Fallacies, Formal and Informal;
Categories of Informal Fallacies, Fallacies of Relevance, Fallacies of Weak
Induction, Fallacies of Presumption, Fallacies of Ambiguity, Fallacies of
Grammatical Analogy

Categorical Propositions: Introduction; Categorical Propositions, The Components

of Categorical Propositions, Attributes of Categorical Propositions: Quality,
Quantity, and Distribution, Representing Categorical Propositions, Venn Diagrams,
Boolean and Aristotelian Square of Oppositions, Evaluating Immediate Inferences:
Venn Diagrams and6. Square of Oppositions, Logical Operations: Conversion,
Obversion, and Contraposition

44 | P a g e
Pre-requisites

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook

References • Hurley, Patrick J. (2014) A Concise Introduction to Logic, 12th Edition,

Wadsworth, Cengage Learning.
• Hurley, Patrick J. (2012) A Concise Introduction to Logic, 11th Edition,
Wadsworth, Cengage Learning
• Copi, Irving M.and Carl Cohen, (1990) Introduction to Logic, New York:
Macmillan Publishing Company.
• Damer, Edward. (2005). Attacking faulty reasoning. A practical guide to fallacy
free argument. Wadsworth Cengage learning, USA. Fogelin, Robert, J, (1987)
Understanding Arguments: An Introduction to Informal Logic, New York:
Harcourt Brace Jvanovich Publisher.
• Guttenplan, Samuel: (1991) The Language of Logic. Oxford: Blackwell
Publishers Stephen, C.(200). The Power of Logic. London and Toronto:
Mayfield Publishing company.

45 | P a g e
 • Simico, N.D and G.G James. (1983) Elementary Logic, Belmont, Ca:
Wadsworth Publishing Company.
• Walelign, Emuru, (2009) Freshman Logic, Addis Ababa.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.5. General Psychology

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code Psch1011
Course Title IX. General Psychology
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives • The course General Psychology encompasses the fundamental concepts and
principles of psychology which have immense application to human life
problems.
• Hence, this course is intended to introduce students to the basic concepts of
psychology and acquaint them with how to apply psychological knowledge,
principles, and theories to real life situation and
problems.
• So, it is of paramount importance for students of any field of study to be
effective in their personal, social, and professional life. Apart from that, it is
to introduce students to the core set of life skills, which are important in
realizing holistic development of students (i.e sense of well-being,
confidence and academic performance) so that they can lead happy, healthy,
successful, and productive life.
Competences to be
Acquired

46 | P a g e
Learning outcomes At the completion of the course, the student will be able

• Describe basic psychological concepts.

• Compare and contrast the major theoretical perspectives in psychology.
• Discuss different aspects of human development
• Compare and contrast different learning theories
• Summarize motivational and emotional processes
• Demonstrate social and interpersonal skills in everyday life.
• Set an adaptive goal and plan for future.
• Apply knowledge of psychology to one’s own life & to develop life skills.
• Explain ways how self-confidence, self-esteem, self-efficacy, assertiveness,
responsible behaviors, interpersonal skills will be strengthened.
• Apply different stress coping mechanisms

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

2 10 Essence of Psychology: Definition of Basic Concepts; Goals of Psychology;
Historical Background of Psychology; Theoretical Perspectives in Psychology;
Branches of Psychology; Research Methods in Psychology

2 10 Human Development: Definition and Concepts of Human Development; Facts and

Principles of Human Development; Aspects of Human Development; Theories of
Human Development, Cognitive Theories, Psychosexual Theory, Psychosocial
Theory, Moral Development Theory; Personality Development, Meaning of
Personality, Trait theories of Personality, Humanistic theories of Personality

4 20 Learning and Theories of Learning: Definition, Principles and Characteristics of

Learning; Factors Influencing Learning; Theories of Learning and their Applications,
Behavioral Theory of Learning, Social Learning Theory, Cognitive Learning Theory

3 15 Memory and Forgetting: Memory, Meaning and Process Of Memory, Stages of

Memory, Factors Affecting Memory; Forgetting, Meaning and Concepts of
Forgetting, Theories of Forgetting; Improving Memory

Motivation and Emotion: Motivation, Definition and Types of Motivation, Theories

of Motivation and their Applications, Conflict of Motives and Frustration; Emotion,
Definition of Emotion, Components of Emotion, Theories of Emotion and their
Applications

47 | P a g e
 Psychological Disorders and Treatment Techniques: Nature of Psychological
Disorders; Causes of Psychological Disorders; Types of Psychological Disorders;
Treatment Techniques

Introduction to Life Skills: Nature and Definition of Life skills; Goals of Life Skills;
Components of Life Skills

Intra-personal and Personal Skills: Self-Concept and Self-Awareness; Self-Esteem

and Self-Confidence; Self-Control; Emotional Intelligence and Managing Emotion;
Resilience and Coping with Stress; Anger Management; Critical and Creative
Thinking; Problem Solving and Decision Making

Academic Skills: Time Management; Note-taking and Study Skills; Test-Taking

Skill; Test Anxiety and Overcoming Test Anxiety; Goal Setting; Career
Development Skill

Social Skills: Understanding Intercultural Diversity and Diversity Management;

Gender and Social Inclusion; Interpersonal Communication Skills; Social Influences
and Peer Pressure; Assertiveness; Conflict and Conflict Resolution; Team Work;
Overcoming Risky Behavior

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.

48 | P a g e
 ▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook

References • Coon, D. & Mitterer, J.O. (2008). Introduction to psychology: Gateways to mind
and behaviour (12th ed). New York, NY: McGraw Hill.
• Feldman, R.S. (2018). Essentials of understanding psychology (13th ed). New
York, NY: McGraw Hill.
• Gray, P. & Bjorklund, D.F. (2017). Psychology (7th ed). New York, NY: Worth
Publishers.
• Kalat, J.W. (2013). Introduction to psychology (13th ed). New York, NY:
McGraw Hill.
• Lahey, B.B. (2008). Psychology: An introduction (10th ed). New York, NY:
McGrawHill.
• Lilienfeld, S.O., Lynn, S.J., Namy, L.L. & Woolf, N.J. (2017). Psychology:
From Inquiry to understanding (3rd ed). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson
Education.
• Meyers, D.G. & DeWall, C.N. (2016). Exploring psychology in modules (10th
ed). New York, NY: Worth publishers.
• Weiten, W. (2014). Psychology: Themes and variations (briefer version, 9th ed).
Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing.
• Burnard, P. (1989). Teaching interpersonal skills: A handbook of experiential
learning for health professionals. London, UK: Chapman and Hall.
• Cotnell, S. (2013). The study skills handbook. New York, NY: Palgrave
MacMillan. Haddon, P.F. (1990). Mastering personal and interpersonal skills:
Key techniques and personal success. London, UK: Thorogood Ltd.
• Hays, J. (2002). Interpersonal skills at work (2nd ed). New York, NY:
Routledge.
• Pavord, E. & Donnely, E. (2015). Communication and interpersonal skills (2nd
ed). Banbury, UK: Lantern publishing.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

49 | P a g e
 7.3.6. Physical Fitness
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code SpSc1011
Course Title 6. Physical Fitness
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 0
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 -
Course Objectives • This course will provide the students with basic concepts of the five components
of health-related physical fitness (cardiovascular, muscular strength and
endurance, flexibility, and body composition), conditioning, hypokinetic
disease and general principles of training.
• It is mainly practical oriented. As a result, the students will be exposed to
various exercise modalities, sport activities, minor and major games, and
various training techniques as a means to enhance health related physical fitness
components.
• In addition, they will develop the skills to assess each component of fitness and
will practice designing cardiovascular, muscular strength and endurance, and
flexibility programs based on the fitness assessment. The course serves as an
introduction to the role of exercise in health promotion, fitness, performance
including the acute and chronic responses of the body to exercise.
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes By the end of this course, the students will be able to

• Recognize the immediate and long-term responses of the body to various

types of exercise.
• Understands the basic concepts of physical fitness and conditioning
exercises.
• Understand the concept of hypokinetic disease and conditions.
• Distinguish the general principles of fitness training
• Develop conditioning programs to enhance the components of health-related
physical finesses.

50 | P a g e
 • Participate in conditioning programs which may help to develop the
components of health related physical finesses.
• Understand health issues in relation to excess body fatness and excessively
low body fat.
• Develop skills to assess health related physical fitness components.
• Develop healthy body weight management skill.
• Appreciate and value the benefits of regular physical exercise to healthy
living.
• Develop interest to engage in a regular physical exercise program as a life
time activity.
• Develop self-confidence and effective communication skills in and out of the
Faculty environment.

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Concepts of physical fitness and conditioning: Meanings and definitions of terms,
physical fitness, physical conditioning, Physical Activity, Physical exercise and
sport; General principles of fitness training

The Health Benefits of Physical Activity: Physical Activity and Hypokinetic

Diseases/Conditions; Physical Activity and Cardiovascular Diseases; physical
activity and postural deformity

Making Well-Informed Food Choices: Sound Eating Practices; Nutrition and

Physical Performance

Health related components of fitness: Cardiovascular fitness, Meaning and concepts

of cardiovascular fitness, Means and methods of developing cardiovascular fitness;
Muscle fitness, Meaning and concepts of muscle fitness, Means and methods of
developing muscle fitness; Flexibility, Meaning and types of flexibility, Means and
methods of developing flexibility; Body composition, Meaning of body composition,
Health risks associated with over fatness, Health risks associated with excessively
low body fatness

Assessment of fitness components: Assessment of cardiovascular fitness;

Assessment of muscle fitness; Assessment of flexibility; Assessment of body
composition

Development and Assessment of the health-related components of fitness

51 | P a g e
Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook

References • Charles B. Corbin, Gregory J. Weik, William R. Corbin and Karen A. Welk.
(2006). Concepts of fitness and wellness: a comprehensive lifestyle approach.
6th edt.
• Schott k. Powers, Stepheen L. Dod and Virginia J. (2006), Total Fitness and
Wellness.
• Paul M, and Walton T. (2006), Core Concepts in Health, 10th edit.
• Charles B. Corbin and Ruth Lindsey (1990), Fitness for life, 3rd Edition, Scott
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

52 | P a g e
 7.3.7. Geography of Ethiopia and the Horn
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code GeES1011
Course Title 8. Geography of Ethiopia and the Horn
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives • This course attempts to familiarize students with the basic geographic
concepts particularly in relation to Ethiopia and the Horn of Africa. It is also
intended to provide students a sense of place and time (geographic literacy) that
are pivotal in producing knowledgeable and competent citizens that are able to
comprehend and analyze problems and contribute to their solutions.
• The course consists of four parts. The first part provides a brief
description on the location, shape and size of Ethiopia as well as basic skills of
reading maps. Part two introduces the physical background and natural resource
endowment of Ethiopia and the Horn which includes its geology and mineral
resources, topography, climate, drainage and water
resources, soil, fauna and flora. The third part of the course focuses on the
demographic characteristics of the country and its implications on economic
development. The fourth component of the course offers treatment of the
various economic activities of Ethiopia and the Horn which include agriculture,
manufacturing and service sectors. Moreover, Ethiopia in a globalizing world
is treated in the perspectives of the pros and cons of globalization on its natural
resources, population and socio- economic conditions
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes Upon the completion of the course, students will able to:

• Acquire basic knowledge on the geographic attributes of Ethiopia and Horn

• Develop a sense of appreciation and tolerance of cultural diversities and
their interactions
• Acquire general understanding of physical geographic processes, and
human-environment relationships

53 | P a g e
 • Develop ethical aptitudes and dispositions necessary to live in harmony with
the natural environment
• Develop an understanding of national population distributional patterns and
dynamics
• Conceptualize the comparative advantages of economic regimes; and
understand the impacts of globalization.
• Understand their country’s overall geographic conditions and opportunities;
and be proud of the natural endowments and cultural rich Dom that help them
develop a sense of being an Ethiopian.

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Introduction: Geography: Definition, scope, themes and approaches; Location,
Shape and Size of Ethiopia and the Horn, Location and its effects, The shape of
Ethiopia and its implication, The size of Ethiopia and its implications; Basic Skills of
Map Reading

The geology of Ethiopia and the Horn: Introduction; The Geologic Processes:
Endogenic and Exogenic forces; The Geological Time scale and Age Dating
Techniques; Geological Processes and the Resulting Landforms, The Precambrian
Era geologic processes and resultant features, The Paleozoic Era geologic processes
and resultant features, The Mesozoic Era geologic processes and resultant features,
The Cenozoic Era geologic processes and resultant features; Rock and Mineral
Resources of Ethiopia

The topography of Ethiopia and the Horn: Introduction; Physiographic Divisions,

The Western Highlands and Lowlands, The South eastern Highlands and Lowlands,
The Rift Valley; The Impacts of Relief on Biophysical and Socioeconomic
Conditions

Drainage systems and water resources of Ethiopia and the Horn: Introduction;
Major Drainage Systems of Ethiopia; Water Resources: Rivers, Lakes, and
Subsurface Water; General Characteristics of Ethiopian Rivers; Water Resources
Potentials and Development in Ethiopia

The climate of Ethiopia and the Horn: Introduction; Elements and Controls of
Weather and Climate; Spatiotemporal Patterns and Distribution of Temperature and
Rainfall in Ethiopia; Agro-ecological Zones of Ethiopia; Climate and its Implications

54 | P a g e
 on Biophysical and Socioeconomic Aspects; Climate Change/Global Warming:
Causes, Consequences and Response Mechanisms

Soils, natural vegetation and wildlife resources of Ethiopia and the horn:
Introduction; Ethiopian Soils: Types, Degradation and Conservation; Types and
Distribution of Natural Vegetations in Ethiopia; Natural vegetation: Uses,
Degradation and Conservation Strategies; Wildlife Resources of Ethiopia: Types,
Importance, and Conservation Strategies

Population of Ethiopia and the Horn: Introduction; Population Data: Uses and
Sources; Population Dynamics: Fertility, Mortality and Migration; Population
Distribution and Composition; Sociocultural Aspects of Ethiopian Population:
Education, Health and Languages; Settlement Types and Patterns

Economic activities in Ethiopia: Mining, Fishing and Forestry; Agriculture in

Ethiopian, Contributions, potentials and characteristics of agriculture in Ethiopia,
Agricultural systems in Ethiopia, Major problems of Ethiopian agriculture;
Manufacturing in Ethiopia, Manufacturing: essence and contributions, Types,
characteristics and distribution of manufacturing, Industrial development in Ethiopia:
Challenges and Prospects; The Service Sector in Ethiopia, Transportation and
communication in Ethiopia: types, roles and characteristics, Trade in Ethiopia: types,
contributions and characteristics, Tourism in Ethiopia: Types, major tourist attraction
sites, challenges and prospects

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated

55 | P a g e
 ▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • A.D. Tathe. (2012). Lecture Notes on Climatology: For Intermediate Met
Training Course, Indian Meteorological Department.
• Addis Ababa University (2001). Introductory Geography of Ethiopia, Teaching
Text, Department of Geography.
• Assefa M., Melese W., Shimelis G. (2014). Nile River Basin; Ecohydrological
Challenges, Climate Change and Hydro politics. Springer International
Publishing, Switzerland.
• B. D, Ray (1989). Economics for Agriculture: Food, Farming and the Rural
Economy. Macmillan
• CSA 1994 & 2007. Population and Housing Census Results. CSA: A.A.
• Diao, Xinshen,. 2007. The Role of Agriculture in Economic Development:
Implications for Sub Saharan Africa. Sustainable Solutions for ending Hunger
and Poverty, Research Report 153. IFPRI.Ethiopia.
• Engdawork Assefa (2015). Characterization and classification of major
agricultural soils in CASCEP intervention weredas in the central highlands of
Oromia Region, Ethiopia, Addis Ababa University
• FDRE.2001 Ministry of Water Resources, National Metrological Survey, A.A.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.8. Social Anthropology

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code Anth1012
Course Title 9. Social Anthropology

56 | P a g e
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 4
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
48 - - 48
Course Objectives This course is designed to introduce the anthropology of Ethiopian societies and
cultures to first year students of Higher Learning Institutions (HLIs). It covers basic
concepts of anthropology such as culture, society and humanity. It also discusses
themes including unity and diversity; kinship, marriage and family; indigenous
knowledge systems and local governance, identity, multiculturalism, conflict,
conflict resolution and peace making system; intra and interethnic relations of
Ethiopian peoples. In addition, the course explores culture areas of Ethiopia such as
plough culture, enset culture and pastoralism. The course further covers marginalized
minority and vulnerable groups in terms of age, gender, occupation and ethnicity by
taking ethnographic case studies into account and discuss ways of inclusive growth

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes Upon the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:

• Develop an understanding of the nature of anthropology and its broader

scope in making sense of humanity in a global perspective;
• Understand the cultural and biological diversity of humanity and unity in
diversity across the world and in Ethiopia;
• Analyze the problems of ethnocentrism against the backdrop of cultural
relativism;
• Realize the socially constructed nature of identities & social categories such
as gender, ethnicity, race and sexuality;
• Explore the various peoples and cultures of Ethiopia;
• Understand the social, cultural, political, religious& economic life of
different ethnolinguistic & cultural groups of Ethiopia;
• Understand different forms marginalization and develop skills inclusiveness;
• Appreciate the customary systems of governance and conflict resolution
institutions of the various peoples of Ethiopia;
• Know about values, norms and cultural practices that maintain society
together;
• Recognize the culture area of peoples of Ethiopia and the forms of interaction
developed over time among themselves; and
• Develop broader views and skills to deal with people from a wide variety of
socioeconomic and cultural backgrounds

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required

57 | P a g e
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Introducing Anthropology and its Subjects: What is anthropology – a Mirror for
Humanity?; sketching the subject matter, scope and concerns of anthropology;
anthropological imagination:, asking questions and seeing the world
anthropologically, Q- What does it mean by using the anthropological lens when
looking at the world?, defining Features of Anthropology- holism, relativism &
comparative perspectives, methods of research in anthropology, ethnography &
ethnographic methods; sub-fields of Anthropology, four mirrors for understanding
humanity; the relation between anthropology and other disciplines

Human Culture and Ties that Connect: Conceptualizing Culture, What Culture Is
and What Culture Isn’t? Characteristics features of culture, what differentiates culture
from other traditions?;Aspects of Culture –Material & Non-material (values, beliefs
& norms); Levels of culture: universality, generality and particularity (cultural
diversity); Ethnocentrism, Cultural relativism, and human rights-Discussion-
Debating cultural relativism: Human rights law and the demonization of culture and
anthropology along the way, Cultural Change: what is cultural change?; Cultural
Diffusion versus Cultural Assimilation, Innovation, Discussion – Contesting culture
as sharply bounded versus unbounded ‘cultural flows’ or as ‘fields of discourse’ in
the context of globalization; Ties that Connect: Marriage, Family and Kinship,
Marriage -rules, functions and forms of Marriage, Family -types and functions of
Family • Q. How families and marriage differ in different societies? Kinship System
-types of kin groups and rules of descent, Kinship and Gender Across Cultures Sex
and Gender: Mapping differences in cross cultural perspective Gender –as power
relations; Cultural practices, norms and values that maintain society together

Human Diversity, Culture Areas, and Contact in Ethiopia: Human Beings &
Being Human: What it is to be human? (a bio-cultural animal?); Origin of the Modern
Human Species: Homo sapiens sapiens (that’s you!); Religious, biological &
evolutionary (paleoanthropological) explanations; The Kinds of Humanity: human
physical variation • Q. Why isn’t everyone the same? Q. Why do people worldwide
have differences in their phenotypic attributes? Human Races: the history of racial
typing; The Grand Illusion: Race, turns out, is arbitrary • Q. What can we say for sure
about human races? Why is Everyone Different? Human Cultural Diversity -
anthropological explanations • Q. Why don’t others do things the way we/I do?
Culture areas and cultural contacts in Ethiopia; Plough culture area; Enset culture
area; Pastoral societies culture area; Historical and social interactions between culture
areas

58 | P a g e
 Marginalized, Minorities, and Vulnerable Groups: Gender based marginalization;
Occupational cast groups; Age based vulnerability (children and old age issues);
Religious and ethnic minorities; Human right approaches and inclusive growth,
anthropological perspectives

Theories of inter-ethnic relations and multiculturalism in Ethiopia: The Scales

of Human Identity: Who am I? Understanding ‘self’ & ‘other’ • Q- What are the ways
we tell for others who we are? Ethnicity and Race: What’s in a name? Ethnic Groups
& Ethnic Identity • Q. What is the basis of one’s ethnic identity? • Q. Is ethnicity a
fundamental aspect of human nature & self-consciousness, essentially unchanging
and unchangeable identity? Or • Q. Is it, to whatever extent, socially constructed,
strategically or tactically manipulable, and capable of change at both the individual
and collective levels? Race –the social construction of racial identity • Q. Do the
claims of some people/groups about superior & inferior racial groups have any
scientific validity? Primordialism; Instrumentalism; Social constructivism; Debates
on inter-ethnic relations and identities

Customary and local governance systems and peace making: Indigenous

knowledge systems and local governance; Intra and inter-ethnic conflict resolution
institutions Ethnographic cases: commonalities and shared practices (e.g., Oromo and
Somali, Afar and Tigray; Gedeo and Oromo; Guraghe and Siltie; Amara and Tigray);
Customary/Local governance systems Ethnographic cases: Oromo Geda; Somali-
Gurti; Gamo, Gofa, WolayitaWoga; Guraghe-Sera; Legal pluralism: Interrelations
between customary, religious and state legal system

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated

59 | P a g e
 ▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • Asmarom Legesse (2006). Oromo Democracy: an Indigenous African

Political System. The Red Sea Press, Inc.
• Cameron, M. Smith and Evan T. Davies (2008). Anthropology for Dummies.
Wiley Publishing, Inc., Indianapolis, Indiana.
• Clifored Geertz. (1973). The Interpretation of Cultures. A division of Harper
Collin Publishers.\
• Donald Donham . (1986). Marxist Modern. The Ethnographic History of
Marxist Ethiopia.
• Donald N. Levine. (1974). Greater Ethiopia: The Evolution of A Multiethnic
Society. Chicago & London., University of Chicago.
• Dunif-Hattis and Howard C. (1992). Anthropology: Understanding Human
Adaptation. New York: Harper Collins, Inc.
• Eriksen, T. H. (2001). Small Places, larger Issues: An introduction to social
and cultural anthropology. London: Pluto Press.
• Eriksen, T. H. (2004). What is anthropology? London: Pluto Press.
• Eriksen, T. Hylland. (2002). Ethnicity and Nationalism. London; Pluto Press.
• Eriksen, T.H. and Nielsen, F.S. (2001). A History of Anthropology.
London: Pluto Press.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.9. General Physics

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code Phys1011
Course Title 9. General Physics
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code

60 | P a g e
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 48
Course Objectives This algebra-based course provides science students with the basic concepts of
physics that enable them to understand describe and explain natural phenomena.
Emphasis is laid on general principles and fundamental concepts in measurements,
mechanical and thermal interactions, fluid mechanics, electromagnetism, oscillations
and waves with applications of physics in various fields of science.
The course is organized into 7 chapters. The chapters on mechanics introduce the
principles and laws governing the motion of objects and the interaction between them
as well as conservation laws. The chapter on heat and temperature discusses the
interaction between systems through energy transfer and describes some basic
thermal properties of such systems. The chapters on oscillations, waves and optics
provide basic concepts of periodic motions, how waves transfer energy from one
place to the other, and use the concepts of light rays to explain image formation by
mirrors and lenses. Electromagnetism and electronics introduce the basic electric and
magnetic phenomena using the concept of field and treats elementary concepts of
semiconductors. Crosscutting applications of physics explain the roles of physics in
Agriculture, Industries, Medicine, Archeology, Power Generation, Earth and Space
Sciences.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes •

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Preliminaries: Physical Quantities and Units of Measurement; Uncertainty in
Measurement and Significant Digits; Vectors: composition and resolution; Unit
Vectors

Kinematics and Dynamics of Particle: Kinematics in One and Two Dimensions,

Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration in 1D and 2D, Motion with Constant
Acceleration, Free Fall Motion, Projectile motion; Particle Dynamics and Planetary
Motion (6hrs), The Concept of Force as a Measure of Interaction, Types of forces,
Newton’s Laws of Motion and Applications, Circular Motion, Newton’s Law of
61 | P a g e
 Universal Gravitation and Examples, Kepler’s laws, satellites motion and
weightlessness; Work, Energy and Linear Momentum (3 hrs), Work and Energy,
Linear Momentum, Conservation of Energy and Linear Momentum / Collisions,
Power, The Concept of Center of Mass

Fluids Mechanics: Properties of Bulk Matter /Stress, Strain/; Density and Pressure
in Static Fluids; Buoyant Forces, Archimedes’ principle; Moving Fluids and
Bernoulli’s Equation

Heat and Thermodynamics: The Concept of Temperature: Zeroth Law of

Thermodynamics; The Concept Heat and Work; Specific Heat and Latent Heat; Heat
Transfer Mechanism; Thermal Expansion; Energy Conservation: First Law of
Thermodynamics

Oscillations, Waves and Optics: Simple Harmonic Motion; The Simple

Pendulum; Wave and Its Characteristics; Resonance; Doppler Effect; Image
formation by thin lenses and mirrors

Electromagnetism and Electronics: Coulomb’s Law and Electric Fields; Electric

Potential; Current, Resistance and Ohm’s Law; Electrical Power; Equivalent
Resistance and Kirchhoff’s Law; Magnetic Field and Magnetic Flux;
Electromagnetic Induction; Insulators, Conductors, Semiconductors; Diodes
Characteristics Curve; Transistors

Cross Cutting Applications of Physics: Application in Agriculture, Energy balance

concept, energy balance in soils, moisture content, soil densities, soil moisture
characteristics; Physics and Industries, Principle of Motor and generator; Physics in
Health Sciences and Medical Imaging, Radiation and its biological effect, x-ray,
MRI, Ultrasound; Physics and Archeology, Radioactive Dating; Application in Earth
and Space Sciences, Geothermal Energy, Seismometer, Radio and TV
communications; Application in Power Generation, Solar and Wind Energy, Nuclear
Power Plants, Hydroelectric power

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

62 | P a g e
Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20
Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • Serway, R. A. and Vuille, C., 2018, College Physics, 11th ed., Cengage
Learning, Boston, USA\
• University Physics with Modern Physics by Young, freedman and Lewis Ford
• Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics by Douglas C.
Giancoli
• Fundamentals of physics by David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Gearl Walker
• College Physics by Hugh D. Young Sears Zemansky, 9th edition
• Herman Cember and Thomas A. Johnson, Introduction to Health Physics, 4th
ed., (2008).
• William R. Hendee and E. Russell Ritenour, Medical Imaging Physics, 4th ed.,
(2002).
• Tayal D.C. Basic Electronics. 2nd ed. Himalaya Publishing House Mumbai,
(1998).
• Theraja B.L., R.S. Sedha. Principles of Electronic Devices and Circuits,
S.Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi, (2004).11

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

63 | P a g e
8.9.10. Computer Programming
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code SECT1082
Course Title 8. Computer Programming

Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering

Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 32 16 80
Course Objectives After successfully completed this course, the student should be able to:

• Identify Major components of computer system

• Know the representation of information in computers
• Draw flow chart for simple programming problems
• Write a program using C++ for looping and conditional problems
• Write a program by decomposing a problem using functions
• Use arrays and structures as a user defined data type
• Use pointers to dynamically allocate memory
• Do simple input and output on text
• Appreciate the advantage of OOP over the Procedural Programming

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes •

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Fundamentals of Computers
• Introduction
• Evolution
• Computer Architecture Basics

64 | P a g e
 • Hardware and Software
• Representation of numbers
• Binary arithmetic

Fundamental of C++ Programming

• Basics of programming
• Algorithm and flow chart
• Basics of C++
• Variables and assignment
• Declaration and initialization
• Input /output

Loops and Decisions

• Introduction
• Decisions
• Loops
• Break, continue, go to

Functions

• Introduction
• Passing arguments
• Returning values
• Overloaded and Recursive Functions

Arrays and Structures

• One dimensional array

• Multidimensional array
• Accessing structure members
• Passing structures to functions

File Input and Output

• Creating a file
• Opening and Closing a file
• Reading and writing text files

Introduction to OOP

• Introduction

65 | P a g e
 • Procedure Oriented Programming
• Object Oriented Programming

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • Absolute C++, 5th Ed, Walt Savitch, Addison Wesley,2009

• C++ From the Ground Up, Herbert Schildt
• Programming in C++, Timothy B. Dorazio
• How to program in C++, Deitel and PJ. Deitel
• Any Programming book in C++

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

66 | P a g e
8.3.11. Introduction to Emerging Technologies
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code EmTe1012
Course Title 8. Introduction to Emerging Technologies

Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering

Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives This course will enable students to explore current breakthrough technologies
in the areas of Artificial Intelligence, Internet of Things and Augmented Reality that
have emerged over the past few years. Besides helping learners become literate in
emerging technologies, the course will prepare them to use technology in their
respective professional preparations.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes By the end of this course the student will able to:

• Identify different emerging technologies

• Differentiate different emerging technologies
• Select appropriate technology and tools for a given task
• Identify necessary inputs for application of emerging technologies

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Introduction to Emerging Technologies: Evolution of technologies, Introduction
to Industrial revolution, Historical background (IR 1.0, IR 2.0, IR 3.0), Fourth
industrial revolution (IR 4.0); Role of data for Emerging technologies; Enabling
devices and networks for emerging technologies (programmable devices); Human
to Machine Interaction; Future trends in emerging technologies

67 | P a g e
 Introduction to Data Science: Overview for Data Science: Definition of data and
information, Data types and representation; Data Value Chain, Data Acquisition,
Data Analysis, Data Curating, Data Storage, Data Usage; Basic concepts of Big
data

Artificial Intelligence (AI): Introduction to AI, What is AI, History of AI, Levels
of AI, Types of AI; Applications of AI, Agriculture, Health, Business (Emerging
market), Education; AI tools and platforms (eg: scratch/object tracking); Sample
application with hands on activity (simulation based)

Internet of Things (IoT): Overview of IOT, What is IOT?, History of IOT,

Advantages of IOT, Challenges of IOT; How IOT works, Architecture of IOT,
Devices and network; Applications of IOT, Smart home, Smart grid, Smart city,
Wearable devices, Smart farming; IOT tools and platforms (eg: KAA IoT /Device
Hive/Zetta/Things Board...); Sample application with hands on activity (eg IOT
based smart farming)

Augmented Reality (AR): Introduction to AR; Virtual reality (VR), Augmented

Reality (AR) vs mixed reality (MR); Architecture of AR systems; Application of AR
systems (education, medical, assistance, entertainment) workshop-oriented hands
demo

Ethics and professionalism of emerging technologies: Technology and ethics;

Digital privacy; Accountability and trust; Treats and challenges

Other emerging technologies: Nanotechnology; Biotechnology; Blockchain

technology; Cloud and quantum computing; Autonomic computing; Computer
vision; Embed systems; Cyber security; Additive manufacturing (3D Printing),3tc

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

68 | P a g e
 Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • Follett, J. (2014). Designing for Emerging Technologies: UX for Genomics,

Robotics, and the Internet of Things: O'Reilly Media.
• Vong, J., & Song, I. (2014). Emerging Technologies for Emerging Markets:
Springer Singapore.
• Del Rosal, V. (2015). Disruption: Emerging Technologies and the Future of
Work. Emtechub.
• Sadiku, M. N. O. (2019). Emerging Internet-Based Technologies: CRC Press.
Mohamed Anis Bach Tobji, Rim Jallouli, Yamen Koubaa, Anton Nijholt Digital
Economy. Emerging Technologies and Business Innovation, 2018
• Mahdi H. Miraz, Peter Excell, Andrew Ware, Safeeullah Soomro, Maaruf Ali,
Emerging
• Technologies in Computing, Lecture Notes of the Institute for Computer
Sciences, Social Informatics and Telecommunications Engineering 200,
Springer International Publishing, 2018.

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.12. Engineering Drawing

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code MEng2061

Course Title Engineering Drawing

Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering

69 | P a g e
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 48
Course Objectives The course is designed to provide the students with concepts of Technical
Drawing, Preparing the objects to visualize the dimensions with the help of various
drawing instruments in the drawing room like mini drafter, set squares, scale
protractor, board and also with the help of latest tools like cut models made up of
wood paper or any other material.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes Upon completion of the course, students will able to:

• Reading and prepare of Technical Drawings

• Draw various views of an object
• Draw an object from different views

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Basic concept of Geometric construction: Overview of Projections; progress to
principles of projection techniques; Multi-View Projection; Pictorial Projection

Auxiliary Views: Sectional Views

Intersections and Development of Simple Transition Pieces

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 2/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

70 | P a g e
 Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20
Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • French, T. E. and Helsel, J. D. (2003), Technical Drawing: Board and CAD
Techniques, Student Edition, 13th edition,Glencoe/McGraw-Hill.
• Giesecke, F.E., Mitchell, A., Spencer, H.C.and et al. (2002), Technical Drawing,
12th edition, Prentice Hall.

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.13. Engineering Mechanics (Statics)

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code CEng2051

Course Title Engineering Mechanics (Statics)

Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering

Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5

71 | P a g e
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 48
Course Objectives This course is designed to develop skills in treating the Static analysis of rigid
bodies like concepts of equations of static equilibrium and basic principles governing
motion of
objects, analysis of motion variables, and deriving equation of motion relating forces
acting and resulting motion.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes At the end of this course the student will be able to:

• Solve the resultants of any force systems

• Draw and level free body diagrams for single particles and rigid body
systems
• Understand the vectorial and scalar representation os forces and moments
• Describe static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies
• Analyze the properties of surfaces and solids in relation to the moment of
inertial
• Illustrate the laws of motion, kinematics of motion and their relationships
• Obtain the centroid, first moment and second moment of an area

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Basic and concepts: Principles of statics
Force Vectors: Vector operations, resolving of forces, resultant of forces using
Trigonometric method (Graphical and Analytical) and Cartesian methods
Equilibrium of particles: Free body diagram concepts(Trusses, Frames and
Machines); solving equilibrium problems; spring and pulley system concepts
Resultants of coplanar force systems: Equation of equilibrium for coplanar force
systems; equilibrium of simple structures
Properties of surfaces: Moments of inertia of areas and bodies

Non-coplanar force systems: Static friction; Method of virtual work

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 2/I

Status of Course Compulsory

72 | P a g e
Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial
Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References References:

• F.P. Beer, E.R. Johnston and E.R. Eisenberg, Vector Mechanics for
Engineers Statics, 7th edition, McGraw- Hill, 2004.
• Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G. (2006), Engineering Mechanics (Statics),
6th edition, Wiley.
• Beer, F.P. and Johnston, R.E. Jr. (2007), Vector Mechanics for Engineers,
Statics, 5th edition, McGraw-Hill Science/ Engineering /Math

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.14. Mathematics for Natural Science

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code Math1011

73 | P a g e
Course Title Mathematics for Natural Science

Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering

Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives The course intends to prepare natural science students with the basic concepts
and materials from mathematics that necessitate a good foundation to treat
fundamental mathematical tools in science. This course rigorously discusses the basic
concepts of logic and set theory, the real and complex number systems, mathematical
induction, least upper bound and greatest lower bound, functions and types of
functions, polynomial and rational functions, logarithmic and exponential functions,
trigonometric functions, hyperbolic functions and their graphs and analytic geometry.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
• After completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Apply propositional logic in reasoning,
• Use quantifiers in open propositions in mathematical logic
• Understand concepts of sets and set operations,
• Understand the fundamental properties of real numbers
• Use mathematical induction in proofs,
• Analyze least upper bound and greatest lower bound,
• Understand the fundamental properties of complex numbers
• Express complex numbers in polar representation
• Explain different types of functions, their inverses and their graphs\
• Evaluate zeros of polynomials
• Understand basic properties of logarithmic, exponential, hyperbolic, and
trigonometric functions
• Understand basic concept of analytic geometry
• Derive equations of conic sections

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Contents

Propositional logic and Set Theory: Definition and examples of proposition,
Logical connectives, Compound (or complex) propositions, Tautology and

74 | P a g e
 contradiction, Open proposition and quantifiers; Set theory, the concept of a set,
Description of sets, Set operations and Venn diagrams
The real and complex number systems: The real number system, The natural
numbers, Principle of mathematical induction and the Well ordering Principle, The
integers, rational numbers and real numbers, Upper bound and lower bound: least
upper bound and greatest lower bound; Completeness property of real numbers;
Complex number system, Definition of complex numbers and their operations,
Polar representation of complex numbers and the De-Moivere’s formula, Extraction
of roots
Functions: Review of relations and functions; Real-valued functions and their
properties; Types of functions and inverse of a function; Polynomials, zeros of
polynomials, rational functions, and their graphs; Definitions and basic properties
of logarithmic, exponential, trigonometric and hyperbolic functions, and their
graphs.
Analytic Geometry: The straight-line: Division of segments and various forms of
equation of a line; Circles, Definition of circle and examples, Equation of a circle
centre at the origin and different from the origin, Intersection of a circle and a line;
Parabola, Definition of parabola and standard form of equation of parabola,
Equation of parabola parallel to the xaxis (the y-axis); Ellipse, Definition of Ellipse
and examples, Equation of ellipse centre at the origin and different from the origin;
Hyperbola, Definition of circle and examples, Equation of hyperbola of center at
the origin transverse axis to x-axis (the y-axis)

Pre-requisites None

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 1/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.

75 | P a g e
 ▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook •

References • Abera Abay, An Introduction to Analytic Geometry, AAU, 1998 Alemayehu

Haile and Yismaw
• Alemu, Mathematics an Introductory Course, Department of Mathematics, AAU

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.14. Engineering Laboratory I

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG2043
Course Title Electrical Engineering Laboratory I
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Basic Electrical Engineering
Module Code ECEGM2043
Module Coordinator Xx
Lecturer Xx
ECTS Credit 3
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home Study
Laboratory
- - 48 32
Course Objectives & • To use electrical instruments for practical measurements
Competences to be • To practice null balance method using bridges for accurate measurements
Acquired • To practice measurement of dynamic parameters by oscilloscope
Course Description

76 | P a g e
Week C. hour Course Contents
1. Study of Resistance Color Code
2. Resistance Measurements with Ohmmeters and DC bridges
3. Basic DC Voltage and Current Measurements and Range Extension
4. KVL, KCL, Superposition, Thevenin & Norton Realization
5. Periodic waveforms and Oscilloscope
6. AC voltage and Current Measurement with AC indicators and
Oscilloscope
7. Experimental Analysis of RL, RC and RLC Transients
8. Power Measurements
9. Power Factor Improvement
10. Series and Parallel resonance
11. Hysteresis
Pre-requisites -
Co-requisite ECEG2041: Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
Target group/Semester 2/I
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning Methods Laboratory Exercise
Assessment/ Evaluation & Lab Reports (40%), Participation (30%), Final Exam (30%)
Grading System
Attendance Requirements For all laboratory exercises, the student must attend without fail (100%)

Literature Textbook:
• Engineering Circuit Analysis, by H. Hyte & J.E. Kemmerly
References:
• Laboratory manual provided in the lab
Approved By:
________________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.15. Signals and Systems Analysis

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3081
Course Title Signals and Systems Analysis
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering

77 | P a g e
Module Name Signals and Networks Analysis

Module Code ECEGM3083

Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives ▪ Enable students to understand and apply the representation, classification,
characterization and analysis of signals and systems in time and frequency
domains
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on Extend skill using Matlab

software) to acquire or
required
Course Description In this course, the following core contents will be studied: Signal Systems, Fourier
series Representation on Periodic Signals, Singularity Functions, Convolution,
Ordinary Linear Differential Equations (OLDE), Fourier Transforms and Inverse
Transforms, The Sampling Theorem, Laplace Transforms, Inverse Laplace
Transforms, Z-Transforms and Inverse Transforms.
Week Contact. Course Contents
Hrs
Week 1,2 Introduction to Signals and Systems
Elementary Signals, Over view of Specific Signal Systems, Signal Classification,
10
Operations on signals (signal manipulations), Signal Representation, System
Properties
Week 3,4 Time Domain Representations for Linear Time- Invariant (LTI) Systems
10 Convolution: Impulse Response Representation for LTI systems, Properties of
Impulse Response Representation for LTI systems, Interconnection of systems
Week 5,6,7 Differential and Difference Equation Representations for LTI Systems
Solving differential and difference equations, Block Diagram Representations,
15
State Variable Representations for LTI Systems, The state-variable description,
Transformations of the state
Week Fourier Analysis of Continuous and Discrete-Time Signals and Systems
15
8,9,10

78 | P a g e
 Continuous-Time Fourier Series (CTFS) of Periodic Signals, The Fourier
Transforms, Sampling Theorem, Introduction to Discrete Fourier Transforms
(DTFT), Applications of Fourier Series and Transform
Week 11,12 The Laplace Transformation: Representation of Signals Using Continuous
Time Complex Exponentials
Definition of the Laplace Transformation, Properties and Theorems of the
10
Laplace Transform, The Inverse Laplace transform, Solving Differential
Equations Using Initial Conditions, Transform Analysis of LTI Systems,
Applications of Laplace Transforms
Week The Z-Transform: Representation of Signals Using Discrete-Time Complex
13,14,15 Exponentials
Definition and Special Forms of the Z Transform, Properties and Theorems of the
15
Z Transform, The Inverse Z Transform, Transform Analysis of LTI systems, The
Transfer Function of Discrete −Time Systems, State Equations for Discrete−Time
systems, Applications of Z-Transform
Week 16 3 Final Examination

Pre-requisites Applied Mathematics III

Co-requisites

Semester Year 3, Semester I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lectures supported by Tutorials, Assignments, Quizzes. and Practical /Simulation
Methods laboratory exercises.
Assessment/Evaluation& Mid Exam (20%) Assignments, Quizzes and Laboratory Exercise (30 %),Final
Grading System exam (50%)
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.

79 | P a g e
 Text book Signals and Systems - A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, PHI, 2nd
Edn.
References 1. Roberts: Signals and Systems: Analysis using Transform Methods and
MATLAB, MJ, International Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Signals and Systems, Second Edition, Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen,
John, Wiley & Sons, 2003
3. Philip Denbigh: System Analysis and Signal, 1988.
4. Processing with emphasis on the use of matlab, Prentice Hall; 1st edition ,
February 3, 1998
5. Budak: Passive and Active Network Analysis and Synthesis, Houghton
Mifflin, 1974.
6. Hazony: Elements of Network Synthesis, Reinhold,
Approved By:

________________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.16. Network Analysis and Synthesis

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3082
Course Title Network Analysis and Synthesis
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Signals and Networks Analysis

Module Code ECEGM3083

Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80

Course Objectives ▪ Understand and apply the techniques of modeling, analysis, design and
synthesis of N-Port passive and active electric networks and filters in a
classical and a modern approach
Competences to be
Acquired

80 | P a g e
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on Extend Programming, Modeling and Simulation in Matlab

software) to acquire or
required
Course Description This course starts by introducing network analysis and network synthesis. It gets
into some detail of network analysis: exploring network theorems (superposition,
reciprocity, Thevenin’s, and Norton’s theorem) and it explores network transform
representations. It then defines port and discuss about relationship between,
transfer function using two port parameters. And interconnection of two-port
parameter in some detail and then discuss about analysis of ladder network. It then
briefly discuss about frequency response and bode plotting and poles and zeros
versus response. Before we make a synthesis we need to make sure realizability of
the given network so here it will discuss about causality, stability, Hurwitz
polynomial, positive real function and some elementary synthesis procedure. Now
the next part is network synthesis: here it will discuss about property and synthesis
of one port networks using two elements (resistor, inductor and capacitor) and it
discuss synthesis of functions composed of three elements. It then goes to synthesis
of two-port networks: property of transfer function, zeros of transmission, and
synthesis of Y21 and Z21 with a 1-Ω Termination. And at last it discuss about filter
approximation, insertion loss synthesis and synthesis of Active and passive
networks and filters.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
Week 1,2 1. Introduction to network analysis and synthesis
10 Networks and their developmental stages; analysis, design and analysis
concepts;
Week 3,4 2. Network transform representation and analysis
10 Analysis of first and second order circuits; transformed network
equations and analysis;
Week 5,6 3. Elements of reliability theory
10 Causality and stability - time and frequency domain criterions; restrictions on
pole-zero locations of dp and transfer functions;
Week 7,8,9 4. Synthesis of Driving Point Function
• one port networks Elementary synthesis procedures; removal of minimum
15 resistance/conductance; • Two port networks Z -, Y-, H-, and ABCD
parameters; relationship among 2-port parameters; parallel, series, and
cascade interconnections;
Week 10,11 5. Synthesis of transfer functions (two port networks)
10 Auxiliary functions - transmission and reflection
coefficients; terminated two port networks

81 | P a g e
Week 12,13 6. Active network synthesis
10
Active network building blocks; synthesis of active networks;
Week 14,15 7. Active and Passive Filters
Filter categorization and specification; classical filter design techniques -
image parameter technique, constant- k filters, m-derived filters,
composite filters, Modern technique of passive filter synthesis,Modern
10
techniques; synthesis of high pass (HP), band pass (BP) & band rejection
(BR) filters Synthesis of active filters Active filters - merits & demerits
with respect to passive filters; active filter structures and ; transformation
of passive RLC filters into active realization
Week 16 3 Final Examination

Pre-requisites Signal and Systems Analysis

Co-requisites
Semester Year 3, Semester II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lectures supported by Tutorials, Assignments, Quizzes. and Practical /Simulation
Methods laboratory exercises.
Assessment/Evaluation& Mid Exam (20%) Assignments, Quizzes and Laboratory Exercise (30 %),Final
Grading System exam (50%)
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book

References 1. Signals and Systems, Second Edition, Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen,
John, Wiley & Sons, 2003
2. Philip Denbigh: System Analysis and Signal, 1988.
3. Processing with emphasis on the use of matlab, Prentice Hall; 1st edition ,
February 3, 1998

82 | P a g e
 4. Budak: Passive and Active Network Analysis and Synthesis, Houghton
Mifflin, 1974.
5. Hazony: Elements of Network Synthesis, Reinhold, 1963.
6. Roberts: Signals and Systems: Analysis using Transform Methods and
MATLAB, MJ, International Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003

Approved By:

________________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.17. Applied Electronics I

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG2070
Course Title Applied Electronics I
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Applied Electronics
Module Code ECEGM2073
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives ▪ To teach students the structural details and fundamental concepts of
Semiconductor materials and P–N junctions and the working principles of
Semiconductor Diode and its applications.
▪ To discuss basic concepts of electronic circuits with the aid of characteristic
curves
▪ To introduce sample applications and design guidelines of electronic circuits
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on Students will understand the concepts, know-how, and tools of Electronic Design
software) to acquire or Automation (EDA) for circuit analysis and design
required

83 | P a g e
Course Description Introduction of the study of Electronics, Basic of Semiconductor Theory;
Semiconductor diodes and their applications; Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJT) and
their application, Bias methods for Bipolar junction transistors, BJT Small-signal
model and analysis, Design of BJT Amplifiers, Field-Effect Transistors and their
Applications, Electronic Amplifiers, Frequency Response of Electronic Amplifiers;
Multistage Amplifiers; Power Amplifiers; Tuned Amplifiers
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
2 10 Basic of Semiconductor Theory: Introduction to the study of Electronics, Atomic
theory, Band Theory, Semiconductors, PN Junction

2 10 Semiconductor diodes and their applications: Introduction, Biasing of Diode, V-I

Characteristics of Diode, Parameter of PN Junction Diode, Diode Equivalent Circuit,
Application of Diodes, Special Diodes

4 20 Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJT) and their applications: Introduction to

transistors, Structure, and operation of BJT, Characteristics, and Parameters of BJT,
Bias methods for Bipolar junction transistors, BJT Small-signal model and analysis,
Design of BJT Amplifier Circuits

3 15 Field-Effect Transistors and their Applications: Introduction to FET,

Classification of FET, Structure, and Operation of FET, Characteristics of FETs, FET
Small-signal model and analysis, Bias methods for FET, Design of FET Amplifier
Circuits

2 10 Electronic Amplifiers: Introduction to Amplification and Amplifiers, Single-stage

and Multistage Amplifiers, Power Amplifiers, Tuned Amplifier

3 15 Frequency Response of Electronic Amplifiers: Introduction, Review of low-

frequency response in semiconductor Amplifiers, High-frequency Model and Miller
theorem, the Frequency response of BJT Amplifiers, the Frequency response of FET
Amplifiers,

Pre-requisites ECEG2041: Fundamental of Electrical Engineering

Co-requisites ECEG2072: Electrical Engineering Lab II

Year/Semester 2/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lectures and tutorial

Methods ▪ Problem-solving sessions.
▪ Case studies using SPICE, Multisim software, and Electronic Design
Automation (EDA)
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.

84 | P a g e
 ▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook 1. Clifford D. Ferris, Elements of Electronic Design, 1995,
2. Neamen, Donald A. Electronic circuit analysis, and design. Vol. 2. New
York, NY, USA: McGraw-Hill, 2001,

References • Bogart, Theodore F. Electronic devices and circuits. Pearson Education

India, 2004.
• Boylestad, Robert L., and Louis Nashelsky. Electronic devices and
circuit theory. Prentice-Hall, 2012.
• Sedra, Adel S., et al. Microelectronic circuits. Vol. 4. New York:
Oxford university press, 2004.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.18. Applied Electronics II

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3071
Course Title Applied Electronics II
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Applied Electronics
Module Code ECEGM2073
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory

85 | P a g e
 32 48 - 80

Course Objectives ▪ .

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes ▪

Skills (such as on Students will understand the concepts, know-how, and tools of Electronic Design
software) to acquire or Automation (EDA) for circuit analysis and design
required
Course Description Feedback circuits, Differential & Operational Amplifiers, Application of Op-
Amps. Oscillators: Principle of Oscillators, Sinusoidal Oscillators- Hartley,
Colpitts, Crystal, RC Phase Shift & Wein Bridge Oscillators. Non-Sinusoidal
Oscillators Multivibrators, Waveshaping Circuit
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
Feedback Amplifiers: Introduction, Fundamental Concepts of Feedback
Amplifier Circuits, Negative Feedback Amplifier, Merits (General Characteristics)
3 20 of Negative Feedback Amplifiers, Voltage Amplifier (Voltage Series Feedback
Amplifier), Voltage Shunt Feedback Amplifier, (Transresistance Amplifier),
Current Series Feedback Amplifier (Transconductance Amplifier), Current Shunt
Feedback Amplifier Current (Series-shunt) Amplifier, Voltage and Current Series
Feedback Amplifiers (Practical Circuit)

Integrated Circuit Amplifiers: Differential amplifiers, IC biasing techniques,

3 15 Response for differential inputs, small and large signal analysis, Operational
amplifier, frequency response and compensation, practical Op-Amps, Op-Amp
applications, Analysis using SPICE simulation

Oscillators: Introduction, Fundamental Concepts of Sinusoidal Oscillators,

Transistor RC Phase-Shift Oscillator, FET–RC Phase-Shift Oscillator, Wien
3 15 Bridge Oscillator Circuit Using Operational Amplifier, LC Oscillators (High-
Frequency Oscillators), Colpitts Oscillator Using FET, Clapp Oscillator, Hartley
Oscillator Circuit, Tuned Collector Oscillator, Tuned Drain Oscillator Circuit,
Crystal Oscillators, UJT Oscillator Circuit

Wave shaping Multivibrator Circuit: Linear Wave Shaping, RC Differentiating

4 15 Circuit (High-pass Circuit), RC Integrator Circuit (Low-pass Circuit), Diode
Clippers, Diode Comparator Circuits, Diode Clamping Circuits, Calculations of
Transistor Switching Times, Multivibrators, Monostable Multivibrator, Bistable
Multivibrators, Transistor Schmitt Trigger Circuit

Pre-requisites ECEG2070: Applied Electronics I

Co-requisites ECEG3073: Electrical Engineering Lab III

86 | P a g e
 Year/Semester 3/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lecture/Problem-solving sessions.

Methods ▪ Case studies using SPICE and Multisim software
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

Grading System ▪ Midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook 1. Gray, Meyer, Analysis, and Design of Analog Integrated Circuit, 4th ed
Wiley 2003
2. Ferris, Elements of Electronic Design, West. 1995
References • Bogart, Electronic Devices & Circuits, 4th Ed, Prentice-Hall. 1997
• Thomas R., The Analysis & Design of Linear Circuits, 2nd Ed, Prentice-Hall.
1998
• Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis & Design, Irwin. 1996
• Boylestad, Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory, 7th Ed, Prentice-Hall. 1999
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.19. Electrical Workshop Practice I

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering

87 | P a g e
Course Code ECEG2042
Course Title Electrical Workshop Practice I
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical Engineering
Module Name Basic Electrical Engineering
Module Code ECEG-M1071
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 3
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
- - 48 48
Course Objectives To enable students to have practical exposure to working environment in
electrical engineering.
To acquaint the students with the various electrical materials and devices used
in electrical installation.
Competences to be Students should have practical wiring skills on lightening, power and signaling
Acquired circuits
Learning outcomes Students will able to handle basic electrical equipment’s.
Students will able to understand domestic and industrial wiring procedures
practically.
Skills (such as on software) Acquire Residential and Industrial installation skill.
to acquire or required
Course Description This course introduces the student to the General Safety of Common types of
Electrical Hand Tools; different methods of Splicing, Joining, Termination and
Soldering; Wiring materials and accessories, Electrical wiring circuits, starting
methods of ac motors, Reversal of direction of motor rotation, and Industrial
Installation.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1. Workshop Safety Rule
1.1 Safety Signs and Instructions
1.2 Common types of Electrical Hand Tools
1.3 Electrical symbols and accessories
1.4 Wiring materials and protection devises
2. Splicing and Joining
2.1 Definition of splicing
2.2 Advantage s of proper splicing
2.3 Types of splices
2.4 Joining wires with connector tubes
3. Termination

88 | P a g e
 3.1 Definition of termination
3.2 Types of termination
3.2.1 Ring-end termination
3.2.2 Stub-end termination
3.2.3 Lug-end termination
4. Soldering
4.1 Definition of Soldering
4.2 Soldering Materials
4.3 Insulating electrical connection
5 .Electrical wiring circuits
5.1. Residential installation

• One lamp controlled by a single-pole , single- throw switch

• Two lamps connected in series controlled by a SPST switch
• Two lamps connected in parallel controlled by a single pole single –
throw switch
• Two lamps controlled independently by single-pole single throw
switches
• Four lamps of two groups controlled by single-pole, single-throw
switches. Group one consists of lamps 1 and 4 and group 2 consists of
lamps 2 and 3 Group 1 is controlled by SW1 and group 2 by SW2
• Two lamps controlled independently by single-pole , single-throw
switches with one earthed single phase socket closely attached to switch
• Two lamps controlled from two different places by means of two-way
switches
• Two lamps controlled from three different places by means of two
three- way switches and by an Intermediate switch
6.2 Fluorescent lamp wiring
• One fluorescent lamp controlled by a single-pole , single- throw
switch
• Two fluorescent lamps controlled from two different places by means
of two three- way switches
• Bell Circuit

6 Industrial installation
6.1 Direct on line (D.O.L) motor starting method
6.2 Motor starting using star-delta switch, autotransformer and via resistors
6.3 Star-delta motor starting using contactors without timer
6.4 Star-delta motor starting using contactors with timer
6.5 Motor reversing using magnetic starter with electrical interlock
Pre-requisites None
Co-requisites None

89 | P a g e
 Year/Semester II/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Workshop Practice
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Continuous assessments(practical, tests, reports, assignments)…….70%
Grading System Final Examination ………………………………………………….30%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 100 % of lab attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book

References 1. Alex Weiss: Workshop Electrics, 2001.

2. Special Interest Model Books : Dec,1998.
3. Manual of Electrical Workshop Practice I
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.20. Electrical Workshop Practice II

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3096
Course Title Electrical Workshop Practice II
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical Engineering
Module Name Basic Electrical Machines

90 | P a g e
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits
Student work load
Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
ECEGM3093
NN
NN
4
Lecture Tutorial Practice or Laboratory Home study
16 - 48 64
▪ To enable students to understand the construction and control of basic
electrical machines.
▪ To enable students, gain the skills of basic computer maintenance
▪ To aid students understand PCB fabrication procedure
▪ Active listening, Critical thinking, Written and oral communication
▪ Interpersonal skills, Problem solving, Team work
▪ Interpret and understand pre-requisite and co-requisite courses
▪ Time management in the Lab
After the completion of this course students are:
▪ Able to design, wind make essential testing of transformers a small
power transformer
▪ Able to maintain and control electrical machines (Industrial motors)
▪ Develop skills on computer maintenance and troubleshooting
▪ Design PCB using AutoCAD software.
▪ Students will acquire the skill of AutoCAD software to design PCB.
Design, winding and testing of small power transformers; Induction to motor
winding (squirrel cage type); Wiring of relay circuits; Computer maintenance and
PCB fabrication.
Course Contents
1. Small Power Transformer Winding: Definition of Transformer;
Properties and Type; Necessary parameters need to be considered
during transformer design; Design of sheet pack, winding coil and
winding assembly of transformer; Winding of coils (primary &
secondary) using winding machine; Testing of the rewind transformer
using different testing mechanisms to check its efficiency.
2. Induction motor winding (squirrel cage type): Induction motor
definition, types and their characteristics; Three phase induction motor
winding types and arrangement; Design of three phase induction motor
winding types (concentric, mush, chain types); Winding of coils using
manual winding machine; Assembly of the winding to the stator of the
91 | P a g e
 motor and finally performing all necessary tests that are done by
maintenance personnel.

3. Wiring of Relay Circuits: Definition, circuit characteristics and

application of relays; Definition and characteristics of timer;
Controlling of induction motors using relays and timer circuits;
Preparing relay circuit wiring diagram and implementing practically to
control the motor; Starting and controlling of induction motor with
Forward-Reverse and Star-Delta methods using push buttons, relays
and contactor; Automatic reversing of direction of motor using timers.

4. Computer maintenance: Introduction to PC and its basic components;

Electrical precautions that need to be considered during
troubleshooting; Features and properties of hard ware components of
PC; Features and operation of PC system unit, motherboard, CPU, and
parts of the system unit.

Pre-requisites ECEG2042: Electrical Workshop Practice I

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 3/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Demonstrations, Workshop practices and Group discussions

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Reports – 40%
Grading System ▪ Class participation – 20%
▪ Final exam – 40%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the reports provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 100 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.

92 | P a g e
 Text book 1. Electrical workshop practice II laboratory manual prepared
by the Faculty

References 1. Frank D. Petruzella - Electric Motors and Control Systems, Second

Edition (2016, McGraw-Hill)
2. Industrial Electricity and Motor Controls Second Edition By Rex Miller
and Mark Miller, 2013
3. Electric Motors Energy Efficiency Guide, CEA Technologies Inc,
Natural Resources Canada, 2007
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.21. Computational Methods

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3061
Course Title Computational Methods
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Advanced Engineering Mathematics
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 - 48 48

Course Objectives ▪ To understand basics of mathematical modelling

▪ To model some physical systems and analyze computational errors
▪ To solve non-linear equations using different computational methods
▪ To explain and solve linear and non-linear systems of equations
▪ To find approximation function for given data using different methods
▪ To integrate and differentiate functions numerically
▪ To solve ordinary differential equations numerically
Competences to be To acquaint the fundamental computational methods to solve scientific and
Acquired engineering problems

93 | P a g e
Learning outcomes ▪ Errors that occurred during computational measurement or experiment will be
determined and analyzed
▪ Finding the real root of non-linear equations using bracketing and open solving
methods
▪ Solving of systems of linear/non-linear of equations using direct/indirect solving
methods
▪ For a given tabulated experimental or measured data finding interpolating
function using different methods of interpolation and approximation
▪ Differentiate and integrate some functions which are difficult to do by ordinary
analytical method
▪ Solving equations consists of one or more functions in one independent variable
along with their derivatives using different numerical methods
Skills (such as on MATLAB, Python, and any related additional software’s used to solve the
software) to acquire or engineering problems

required
Course Description This course aims to introduce the students to Numerical Error Analysis, Solution of
Nonlinear Equations, Solution of Systems of Linear and Nonlinear Equations. In
addition, it will cover Revision of Matrices, Interpolation & Approximation,
Numerical Differentiation & Integration. And finally, it will cover the Numerical
Solution of ODE
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1. Number systems and Numerical Error Analysis:
The Error Problem; Representation of Integers and Fractions; Number
Representation and Storage in Computers; Rounding Off Problem;
Numerical Errors; Significant Digits; Numerical Cancellation; Algorithm for
Conversion from one base to another; Computational Problems and
Algorithms; Computational Efficiency; Computational Methods for Error
Estimation
2. Solution of Non-linear Equations
Methods used in Root Finding; Summary of the Solutions of Nonlinear
Equations; Fixed Point Iteration; Graphical method., Bisection method,
Newton-Raphson Method, Real Roots of Polynomial Equations; Iterative
Methods for Finding Real Zeros of a Polynomial; Order of Convergence
3. Review of Matrices
Elementary Properties of Matrices; Orthogonality and Orthonormality of
Vectors and Matrices; Norm of Vectors and Matrices
4. Systems of Linear and Non-linear Systems
Existence and Uniqueness of Solutions; Methods of Solution of Linear
Equations: Matrix Algebra, Crammer Rule, Gaussian Elimination, Gauss
Jordan Method, LU Decomposition ; Gauss and Gauss Seidel Methods;
Methods of solution of Non-linear Equations: Newton Raphson Method,
and Gauss Seidel Methods;
5. Interpolation and Approximation

94 | P a g e
 Class of Common Approximation Functions; Criteria for the Choice of the
Approximate Function; Finite Differences; Divided Differences;
Interpolation by Polynomials; Least Square Approximation by
Polynomials; Piecewise Polynomial Approximation; Cubic Spline
Interpolation
6. Numerical Differentiation and Integration
Numerical differentiation; Numerical Integration
7. Numerical solution of Differential Equations
Ordinary Differential Equations; Partial Differential Equations
Pre-requisites SECT1082: Computer Programming

Co-requisites

Year /Semester 3/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lecture supported by tutorial, programming exercises and assignments
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Lab exercises with Assignment and Projects (20%)
Grading System Mid-term exam, (30%),
Final examination (50%)

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your
grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook  Chapra C.S. and Canale P.R., ―Numerical Methods for Engineers with
Programming and Software Application

References  John. H. Mathews and Kurtis D. Fink: “Numerical Methods Using

MATLAB”
 Amos G. and Vish S. “Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists
with MATLAB” 3rd ed, Wiley

95 | P a g e
  Ralston A. and P. Rabinowitz: A First Course in Numerical Analysis, 2nd
ed, McGraw Hill, New York, 1987
 Jain M.K., S.R.K. Iyenger and R.K. Jain: Numerical Methods for Scientific
and Engineering Computation, 2nd ed, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1985
 Conte S.D. and Carl de Boor: Elementary Numerical Analysis an Algorithm
Approach, 3rd ed, McGraw Hill Int. Student ed, 1981
 Curtis F. Gerald and Patrick O. Wheatley: Applied Numerical Analysis, 7th
Ed
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.22. Digital Logic Design

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3102
Course Title Digital Logic Design
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Computer Architecture and Programming
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80

Course Objectives ▪ To Introduce Students with Principles of Digital Systems

▪ To Study Number Systems and Differentiate Different Codes in Digital System
▪ To Study Property and Realization of Various Logic Gates
▪ To Study Principles and Properties of Combinational and Sequential Circuits
▪ To Make the Student Able to Design Combinational and Sequential Systems
Competences to be To acquaint the fundamental of digital systems, how to design and implement to solve
Acquired engineering problems
Learning outcomes ▪ Convert between decimal, binary, octal, and hexadecimal Number systems.
▪ Perform two-level logic minimization using Boolean algebra
▪ Minimizing logic circuit using Karnaugh map method.
▪ Implement the Boolean Functions using NAND and NOR gates

96 | P a g e
 ▪ Perform binary addition and subtraction, Incorporate medium-scale integrated
circuits
▪ Differentiate and Design Combinational and Sequential circuits
▪ Use various types of latches and flip-flops to build binary memory and
counters.

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description This course provides an overview of the principles underlying Number systems,
Arithmetic Operations, Decimal Codes, Alphanumeric Codes, Boolean Algebra,
Karnaugh maps, Implementation of Digital Logic Gates using Universal Gates
(NAND and NOR gates), Exclusive-OR Gates, Integrated Circuits, Combinational
Circuits, Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers, Demultiplexers Adders, Subtractors,
Multipliers, Sequential Circuits, Latches, Flip-Flops, Sequential Circuits Analysis,
and Counters. Finally, under this course, Analysis and Design of Combinational and
Sequential Logic Systems will be done.

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

1. Introduction to Digital Systems
▪ Basics of Digital and Analogue Quantities
▪ Binary Digit Logic Level and Digital Waveform
2. Number system, operations and codes
▪ Decimal Number, Binary Number, Hexadecimal Number and Octal
Number
▪ Conversion in Number System
▪ 1’s and 2’s Compliment of Binary Number
▪ Signed Number
▪ Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
3. Logic gates
▪ The Inverter
▪ The AND Gate
▪ The OR Gate
▪ The NAND Gate
▪ The NOR Gate
▪ The Exclusive OR and Exclusive NOR Gates
4. Boolean Algebra and Logic simplification
▪ Boolean operation and expression
▪ Laws and rules of Boolean algebra
▪ De Morgan Theorems
▪ Boolean analysis of logic circuit
▪ The K-map
5. Analysis and Synthesis of Combinational circuit
▪ Basic combinational logic circuits
▪ Implementing Combinational logic
▪ Universal property of NAND and NOR gates
▪ Design of combinational logic circuits
6. Functions of Combinational Logic
▪ Adders
▪ Encoders

97 | P a g e
 ▪ Decoders
▪ Multiplexers
▪ De-multiplexers
7. Sequential Logic Circuit Design
▪ Latches
▪ Flip-flop
▪ Application
8. Counters
▪ Synchronous counters
▪ Asynchronous counters
▪ Up/down counters
▪ Design of synchronous counters
9. Shift Register
▪ Basic shift registers
▪ Serial in serial out registers
▪ Serial in parallel out Registers
10. Memory and Storage (optional)
▪ Basics of Semiconductor Memory
▪ Random access memory (RAMs)
▪ Read-only memory (ROMs)
▪ Programmable ROM’s (PROM, EEPROM)
▪ Flash memories

Pre-requisites ECEG3071: Applied Electronics II

Co-requisites
Year/Semester 3/II
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning Lectures supported by Tutorials, Assignments and Projects
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Tests, Assignments, Quiz’s and Projects (20%)
Grading System Mid semester examination (30 %)
Final exam (50 %)
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes

98 | P a g e
 ▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book  T.L. Floyd: Digital Fundamentals, 9th edition, Prentice Hall

References  Morris M. Mano: Digital Design (3rd Edition)

 Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic: Fundamentals of Digital Logic with
Verilog Design, McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math; 1st edition 2002
 Kenneth J. Breeding, Digital Design Fundamentals, 2nd edition, Prentice
Hall, 1992
 R. J. Tocci and N. S. Widmer: Digital Systems – Principles and Applications,
9th Ed, Prentice Hall, 2004
 R.P. Jain: Modern Digital Electronics, raw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math;
1 edition, (August 21, 2006)
 Any related web content can possibly be referred
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.23. Electrical Engineering Lab II

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG2072
Course Title Electrical Engineering Lab II
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Applied Electronics
Module Code ECEGM2073
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 3
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
- - 48 48

Course Objectives After successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
• Design and analyze simple PN junction diode circuits
• Construct half-wave rectifiers, full-wave rectifiers, voltage regulators, and
diode clippers
• Build a BJT and FET based circuit and study their characteristics
• Design a BJT amplifier and study its gain, plot frequency response.

99 | P a g e
Competences to be To acquaintance with characteristics of various active devices, Amplifiers and to find
Acquired frequency response
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description In this course practical applications of semiconductor diodes and Transistors (Bipolar
Junction Transistors (BJTs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs) introduced.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1 3 Lab 1 : Basic Measurements on Characteristics of Electronic Devices and Circuits

1 3 Lab 2: Diode V-I Characteristics

1 3 Lab 3: Half-Wave and Full-Wave Rectification

1 3 Lab 4: Zener Diode Voltage Regulator and Clippers

1 3 Lab 5: V-I Characteristics of BJT

1 3 Lab 6: BJT Small Signal Amplifier

1 3 Lab 7: Frequency Response of BJT Amplifier

1 3 Lab 8: V-I Characteristics of FET

1 3 Lab 9: Power Amplifiers

Pre-requisites Electrical Engineering Lab I

Co-requisites Applied Electronics I

Year/Semester 2/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Laboratory Practice

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Laboratory Exercise (70%) and Final Examination (30%)
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.

100 | P a g e
 ▪ 100 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book Donald A. Neamen, Microelectronics Circuit Analysis and Design 4th Ed.
References 1. Adel Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, Microelectronic Circuits.
2. Robert L. Boylestad, Luis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory 7th Ed.
3. Bogart, Electronic Devices and Circuits.
4. Jacob Millman, Microelectronics: Analog and Digital circuitsand Systems
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.24. Introduction to Power Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4117
Course Title Introduction to Power Systems
Degree Program B.Sc.
Module Name Electrical Systems Engineering
Module Code ECEGM4113
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives The course objectives include:

• Students will gain an understanding of the fundamentals of power

systems, model components for power transmission and analyse three
phase AC power;
• Students will understand and analyse the performance of transmission
lines, cables and overhead insulators;
• Students will gain the basic analytical skills and calculate the electrical
parameters of a transmission line;

101 | P a g e

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
• Students will gain an understanding of mechanical design considerations
and installation of overhead transmission lines;
• Students will develop a basic understanding of high voltage engineering
components.
• Students will be competent in modelling, designing and analysing of
power systems components;
• Students will have an appreciation of performance analysis of
transmission lines, AC Power, and calculation of electrical parameters of
transmission lines;
• Students will know the mechanical design of overhead transmission
lines; and students will have the knowledge of high voltage engineering
components.
After successful completion, the students will:
• Explain the fundamentals of power systems;
• Model the components of power systems such as generators,
transformers and transmission lines;
• Calculate and analyze three-phase AC power;
• Calculate and analyze the performance of transmission lines, cables and
overhead insulators;
• Explain the basic analytical methods of electrical parameters of a
transmission line and calculate the parameters;
• Do mechanical design of overhead transmission lines; and
• Explain high voltage engineering components.
MATLAB, Power System Simulator
Fundamentals of power systems, Representation of power system components,
Transmission system components and line parameters, Mechanical design and
installation of overhead transmission lines, Characteristic and performance of
power transmission lines, Overhead line insulators, Corona, and Underground
cables
Course Contents
1. Fundamentals of power systems
▪ Historical development of power systems
▪ Sources of energy
▪ Basic structure of power systems
2. Representation of power system components
▪ Review of basic concepts in AC circuit analysis
▪ Single-phase solution of balanced three-phase networks
▪ One-line diagram and impedance or reactance diagram
▪ Per unit (PU) system
102 | P a g e
 3. Transmission system components and line parameters
▪ Transmission system components and design considerations
▪ Resistance of transmission lines
▪ Skin effect and proximity effect
▪ Inductance of transmission lines
▪ Capacitance of transmission lines
▪ Power system simulator lab exercise
4. Mechanical design and installation of overhead transmission lines
▪ Sag and tension calculations
▪ Effect of wind and ice
▪ Transmission line Stringing
5. Characteristic and performance of power transmission lines
▪ Representation of transmission lines
▪ Short, medium and long transmission lines
▪ Power flow through transmission lines
▪ Reactive power compensation of transmission lines
▪ Power system simulator lab exercise
6. Overhead line insulators
▪ Types of insulators
▪ Ratings of insulators
▪ Potential distribution over a string of insulators
▪ String efficiency and methods of improvement (methods of equalizing
potential)
7. Corona
▪ Disruptive critical voltage
▪ Corona loss
▪ Line design based on corona
▪ Advantages and disadvantages of corona
▪ Radio interference
▪ High voltage lab exercise
8. Underground cables
▪ Types of cables
▪ Insulation methods
▪ Parameters of cables
▪ Overhead lines versus underground cables
Pre-requisites ECEG3092: Introduction to Electrical Machines

Co-requisites

Year/Semester 4/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lectures, tutorials, lab exercises

Methods

103 | P a g e
 Assessment/Evaluation& Assignment, Tests and Projects (20%),
Grading System
Mid Semester Examination (30%)

Final examination (50%)

Attendance Requirements 80% lecture attendance and 100% laboratory attendance

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book Textbook:

J. D. Glover, Thomas J. Overbye and M. S. Sarma, Power System Analysis and

Design, Brooks/Cole, Sixth Edition, 2016.

References 1. D P Kothari and I J Nagarath, Modern Power System Analysis, 4th

Edition, 2011

2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis, 3rd Edition, 2011.

3. Syed Nasar, Electrical Power Systems (Schaum’s Outline Series),

McGraw-hill Publishing Company, 2004.
Approved By:
_____________________ ________________
Name (Course Instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.25. Electrical Engineering Lab-IV

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3094
Course Title Electrical Engineering Lab-IV

104 | P a g e
Degree Program
Module Name Basic Electrical Machines
Module Code ECEGM3093
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 3
Student workload Lecture
Course Objectives and
Competences to be Acquired
Learning outcomes
“Electrical Engineering (Focus Area)”, Bachelor of Science
Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
- - 48 48
▪ To understand the speed control of DC motor
▪ To understand the magnetic property of ferromagnetic materials.
▪ To perform no load, short circuit and full load tests on transformers.
▪ To determine terminals of three phase induction motor
▪ To understand different starting methods of three phase induction
motors.
▪ To understand the different characteristics of DC Machines.
▪ To perform open, short circuit and load tests on Synchronous
Generator.
● explain construction and operation principle of dc motors and dc
generators
● Describe the working principle of a DC motor and a DC generator.
● Describe the operation of, and factors affecting output power, torque,
speed and direction of rotation of DC motors.
● Describe the difference between motors and state the use of series
wound, shunt wound and compound DC motors.
● explain construction and operation principle of transformers
● Describe the principle of transformer and state power losses.
● Know different types of transformers.
● Describe reasons for losses and determine saturation point and core
losses
● explain construction and operation principle of ac generators.
● Describe the factors affecting the AC generator output.
● Describe the working principles and state the features of both field- and
armature revolved generators.
● Describe the working principle of three-phase alternators.
● Describe wave forms and phase differences and state features, calculate
phase and line voltage
● explain the construction, features and operation principle of AC
motors.(synchronous motor)
105 | P a g e
 ● Describe the working principle of single and polyphase type AC
synchronous and induction motors and state the characteristics of them.
● Describe methods of speed control and direction of rotation
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

1. starting of DC shunt and compound motor i) by using 4 point starter
ii) by using DC driver.
2. Speed control of DC motor i) Flux control method ii) Armature
controlled method iii) Voltage controlled method
3. Ward Leonard speed control system of DC machines

4. Open circuit characteristics (magnetization curve) of DC shunt

generator. Find out the critical field resistance and critical speed
5. Load test on DC shunt generator

6. Open circuit and short test of single phase transformer? and also find
out the Equivalent circuit and its efficiency.
7. A) Parallel operation of single phase transformer B) three phase
transformer connections
8. Speed control of 3- phase squirrel cage induction motor

9. Speed control of three phase induction motor i) Reduced voltage

control ii) Frequency control iii) Pole changing method.
10. Find out the torque of any electrical machine by using eddy current
dynamometer method.
11. Starting methods of three phase synchronous motor by using rotor
starting resistance method.
12. Brake test on DC shunt motor and also find out the efficiency

Pre-requisites

Co-requisites Introduction to Electrical Machines

Year/Semester 3/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Laboratory Exercise

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation & Lab Reports (30%)
Grading System Practical examination and Participation (30%),
Final Exam (40%)

106 | P a g e
 Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory for lectures and 100 % is
mandatory for laboratory practice.
▪ Please try to be on time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are
late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value
in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book Electrical Engineering Lab-IV Manual By Mr.C.D.varaprasad

References Laboratory manuals provided in the Electrical Machines lab.

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.26. Electrical Engineering Lab III

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3073
Course Title Electrical Engineering Lab III

Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering

Module Name Applied Electronics

Module Code ECEG-M2111

Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 3
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory

107 | P a g e
 - - 48 48
Course Objectives After successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:

Build a small signal amplifier and measure its parameters.

Construct op-amps circuits (inverting amplifier, non-inverting amplifier, summing
amplifier and difference amplifier, integrator, and differentiator) using op-amp.
Build wave shaping circuits: Comparators, Schmitt triggers Multivibrators, and
Oscillators using op-amp and 555 Timer

Competences to be Upon successful completion of this course, you should be able to:
Acquired Design inverting and non-inverting op-amp circuits to meet a given performance goal
Analyze and design circuits such as comparator, Schmitt trigger, timer circuits (e.g.
LM555)
Design active filters for use in applications
Use laboratory equipment to experimentally verify performance of all of the above
circuit
Learning outcomes Be able to design and test various basic linear application circuits using Op-amps
Design and test various signal comparison operation circuits using Op-amps and
Comparators
Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description This course introduces practical applications of BJTs as an amplifier and op-amps in
being used as amplifiers and doing mathematical operations. This laboratory course
also let students build wave shaping circuits: Comparators, Schmitt triggers
Multivibrators, and Oscillators using op-amp and 555 Timer.

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

1. Feedback Amplifier

2. Inverting Op-Amp

3. Non-Inverting Op-Amp and Voltage Follower

4. Summing and Differential Amplifiers

5. Integrator and Differentiator Circuits

6. Comparator Circuits

7. Active Filter

8. RC phase shift and Wein‘s bridge oscillator

9. Schmitt Trigger Circuits

108 | P a g e
 10. Monostable & Astable Multivibrators

Pre-requisites ECEG2072 Electrical Engineering Lab II

Co-requisites ECEG3071 Applied Electronics II

Year/Semester III/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Laboratory exercises

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Continuous assessments(Lab report, quizzes, lab exercises, Laboratory activities)
Grading System 70%
Final Examination 30%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 100 % of lab attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book Donald A. Neamen, Microelectronics Circuit Analysis and Design 4th Ed.

References 1. Robert L. Boylestad, Luis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory 7th
Ed.
2. Bogart, Electronic Devices and Circuits.
3. Jacob Millman, Microelectronics: Analog and Digital circuits and Systems.
4. Albert Paul Malivino, Electronic Principles.
5. Laboratory Manual For Electrical Engineering Lab III
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

109 | P a g e
8.3.27. Applied Modern Physics
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG2052
Course Title Applied Modern Physics
Degree Program BSc.
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 0 80

Course Objectives ▪ To understand the elastic behavior of materials.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
▪ To study production and applications of ultrasonics.
▪ To understand magnetic, dielectric and superconducting properties.
▪ The student would be able to learn the fundamental concepts on Quantum
behavior of matter in its micro state.
▪ Design, characterization and study of properties of material help the students
to prepare new materials for various engineering applications.
▪ The course also helps the students to be exposed to the phenomena of
electromagnetism and also to have exposure on magnetic materials and
dielectric materials.

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

1. Theory of Relativity:
Special Relativity, Time dilation, Doppler effect, Length
contraction, Relativistic momentum, Mass and Energy, Energy
and momentum
2. Electromagnetism and Magnetic Properties of Materials:
Laws of electrostatics, Electric current and the continuity
equation, Ampere’s and Faraday’s laws, Maxwell’s equations,
Polarisation, Permittivity and Dielectric constant, Internal fields

110 | P a g e
 in a solid, Clausius-Mossotti equation, Ferroelectrics and
Piezoelectrics. Magnetisation, permeability and susceptibility,
Classification of magnetic materials, Ferromagnetism and
ferromagnetic domains, Hysteresis, Applications of magnetic
materials.
3. Particle properties of waves:
Black body radiation, Photoelectric effect, X-ray diffraction,
Compton effect, Pair production De Broglie waves, Describing
a wave, Phase and group velocities, Particle diffraction, Particle
in a box, Uncertainty principle I, Uncertainty principle II.
4. Atomic structure:
The nuclear atom, Electron orbits, Atomic spectra, The Bohr
atom, Energy levels and spectra, Atomic excitation, The laser.
5. Quantum mechanics:
Quantum mechanics, The wave equation, Schrödinger‘s
equation steady state form, Schrödinger‘s equation time
dependent form, Particle in a box.
6. Semiconductor Physics:
Intrinsic and Extrinsic semiconductors, Dependence of Fermi
level on carrier-concentration and temperature, Carrier
generation and recombination, Carrier transport: diffusion and
drift, Hall effect, p-n junction diode, Zener diode and their V-I
Characteristics, Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT):
Construction, Principle of operation.
Pre-requisites

Co-requisites

Semester

Status of Course

Teaching & Learning (State the recommended effective teaching and learning methods)
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& (Give the assessment/evaluation tools and their details in % together
Grading System with the grading system)
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.

111 | P a g e
 ▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. Solid State Physics, A. J. Dekkar, MacMillan publishers, 2008
2. Concept of Modern Physics : A. BEISER, McGraw hill Publishers,
2002.
References 1. Solid state physics, Charles Kittel, Wiley student edition University
Physics, Francis W. Sears, Hugh D. Young, Marle Zeemansky and
Roger A Freedman, Pearson Education, 2004 .
2. Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems :Jordan & Balmain,
Pearson Education, 2015.
3. Quantum Mechanics : Leonard Schiff, Tata McGraw hill Publishers,
2010.
4. J. W. Rohlf , Modern Physics: from alpha to Z (John Wiley and Sons,
Inc., New York)
Approved By:
Dr. RP Singh ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.28. Introduction to Communications Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4111
Course Title Introduction to Communications Systems
Degree Program B.Sc.
Module Name Electrical Systems Engineering

Module Code ECEGM4113

Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory

112 | P a g e
 32 48 - 80
Course Objectives ▪ To give a strong background in communication systems engineering.
▪ To introduce with different communication systems
▪ To familiarize with analog modulation and demodulation techniques
▪ To introduce digital modulation techniques
Competences to be ▪ To teach the different analog and digital, linear and non-linear modulation and
Acquired demodulation techniques those are common to many communication systems.
Learning outcomes After successful completion of the course, the students are able to:
▪ Demonstrate knowledge on fundamental process of any communication systems.
▪ Compare different linear and non-linear analog modulation and demodulation
techniques
▪ Appreciate the application of Frequency division Multiplexing and Time
Division Multiplexing
▪ Differentiate the different PCM techniques
▪ Design and analysis superhetrodyne AM/ FM receiver
▪ Understand the effects of under sampling and quantization error in
communication systems
▪ Apply the concept of modulation and demodulation in AM and FM broadcasting
Skills (such as on ▪ Students are expected to acquire design and simulation of communication
software) to acquire or process and systems utilizing MATLAB software.
required
Course Description ▪ This course introduces the student to short description of an analog
communication system, communication channels in different communication
systems ,Analysis of deterministic signals in frequency domain, Signal
transmission in base band, Linear distortion, Nonlinear distortion and
commanding, Analog modulation systems, Analysis of linear modulations such
as AM, DSB, SSB ,Linear modulation and demodulation techniques also
combined with FDM, Nonlinear modulation techniques such as PM and FM,
Survey of sampling techniques for analog pulse modulations such as PAM, PPM
and PDM, Pulse modulation systems, PCM, DM, DPCM,FSK, PSK and ASK.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1. Introduction to Communication Systems
• Historical overview of the communication systems,
• The communication process,
• Communication channels,
• Modulation process,
• Analog and digital communication
• Shannon’s information capacity theorem
2. Amplitude Modulation

113 | P a g e
 • Introduction
• Double side band with carrier
• Double side band suppressed carrier
• Single side band modulation
• Vestigial Sideband Modulation
• Frequency division multiplexing
• Superheterodyne AM receiver
3. Angle Modulation
• Angle modulation
• Narrow band and Wide band Angle Modulation
• FM modulators and demodulators
• Phase modulators and demodulators
• Superheterodyne FM receiver
4. Pulse Modulation
• Sampling process
• Pulse amplitude modulation
• Pulse Width modulation
• Pulse position modulation
• Different quantization techniques and Encoding
• Quantization error
• Pulse code modulation
• Differential pulse code modulation
• Time Division Multiplexing
5. Digital modulation and transmission
• Amplitude shift keying
• Phase shift keying
• Frequency shift keying
• Quadrature amplitude shift keying
• Pulse shaping techniques
Pre-requisites ECEG2061:Probability and Random Processes
ECEG3071: Applied Electronics II,
ECEG3082:Network Analysis and Synthesis,
Co-requisites
Semester Year IV, Semester: I
Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning (State the recommended effective teaching and learning methods)
Methods

114 | P a g e
Assessment/Evaluation& Quiz‘s and Assignments – 20%, Test – 20 %, Simulation and Laboratory
Grading System work – 10%, Final Exam –50%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book S. Haykin, Communication Systems, 4th Edition. New York: John Wiley and Sons
Inc., 2001.
Simon Haykin, Michael Moher, Introduction to Analog and Digital
Communications, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,, 2007
References 1. Frenzel, Louis E., Jr., Principles of electronic communication systems, 4th
edition, New York: McGraw Hill, 2016.
2. Rodger E. Ziemer and William H. Tranter, Principles of communication:
systems, modulation, and noise, 7th edition, 2015.
3. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi., Fundamentals of conununication systems
I – 2nd edition, Pearson Education, Inc., publishing as Prentice Hall, 2014
4. A. Bruce Carlson, Paul B. Crilly, Communication systems: An Introduction
to Signals and Noise in Electrical Communication, 5th Edition. New York:
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2010.
5. B. P. Lathi, Zhi Ding, Modern digital and analog communication systems,
4th edition, New York: Oxford University press, 2010.
6. H. Taub and D. Schilling, Principles of communication systems, 3rd
Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 2008.
7. Leon W. Couch II,–Digital and Analog Communication Systems
8. Upamanyu Madhow, Introduction to Communication Systems, January 17,
2014
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

115 | P a g e
8.3.29. Electrical Materials and Technology
Course Code
Course Title
Degree Program
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits
Student work load
Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
ECEG3052
Electrical Materials and Technology
B.Sc
Electromagnetism and Electrical Materials
ECEGM2053
Dr.V.Ramesh Kumar
5
Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 48
• To introduce the importance of various electrical and electronics
engineering materials
• To understand the characteristics, physical properties, types and
application of conductors, superconductors, semiconductors, insulators
and magnetic materials
• To develop quantitative descriptions of the physical properties of
different materials
Teamwork, planning, responsibility, interpersonal understanding, critical
thinking, and awareness of the basic atomic theory.
At the end of this course students can easily acquire knowledge about
• The classification of conductors, semiconductors, insulators using band
diagram.
• The theories used to understand electron flow in all types of electrical
materials.
• Concepts of basic electrical materials to modern day electrical and
electronic devices such as ferroelectric devices, superconductors like
MRI, MAGLEAV etc.,
• Need and applications of conductors, superconductors, semiconductors,
insulators and magnetic materials.
Consciousness of the basic atomic bonding and energy bonding
This course covers the importance of electrical and electronics engineering
materials and discussing properties, types, applications, merits and basic laws of
116 | P a g e
 conductors, superconductors, semiconductors, insulators and magnetic materials.
It is proposed for students who took Applied electronics, Electromagnetic fields
or equivalent courses.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1.Introduction

Requirements of Engineering materials - Scope, Importance and classification

of electrical and electronics materials - Operational requirements of Electrical
materials - Classification of solids on the basis of energy gap - Comparison of
conductors, semiconductors and insulators

2.Conducting Materials

Classification of Conductor - Factors affecting conductivity of metals – Thermal

conductivity – Heating effect of current – Thermoelectric effect – Seebeck effect,
Petlier effect, Thomson effect – Widemann Franz Law and Lorentz relation –
Mechanically processed forms of electrical materials – Types of conducting
materials – Fusible materials, Filament materials, Solder materials –
Classification of conductors
3.Superconductivity

Phenomenon of superconductivity – Properties of superconductors - Meissner

effect – Critical magnetic field and Critical temperature – Various theories of
Superconductivity (London theory, GLAG theory and BCS theory) -
Classification and Application of superconductors

4.Semiconductor materials

Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors – Energy band diagram - Fermi energy

level – Fermi - Dirac probability function and temperature effect - Analysis of
Drift and diffusion currents - Hall effect, Materials for different semiconductor
devices and applications – Merits
5.Dielectric Materials

Introduction - Properties of dielectric materials - Polarization and Mechanisms of

polarization in dielectrics - Lorentz field - Complex permittivity - Influence of
frequency on permittivity - Mechanisms of electrical breakdown of dielectric
materials, Ferroelectricity – Classification, Types and applications

6.Magnetic Materials

Origin of permanent magnetic dipole – Basic terminologies - Types of magnetic

materials Spontaneous magnetization and the Curie temperature – Laws of

117 | P a g e
 magnetic materials (Curie law, Curie-Weiss law, Neel law) - Classification and
applications

Pre-requisites ECEG3071 : Applied Electronics II

ECEG3051 : Electromagnetic Fields
Co-requisites NN

Semester Year : 3, Semester : 1

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lecture supported by tutorial and assignments

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Minimum 85% for lectures and tutorials
Grading System Minimum 15% for Assignments
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. K.M.Gupta and Nishu Gupta “Advanced Electrical and Electronics
Materials (Process and Applications)”, Advanced Material Series by
Scrivener Publishing, Co-published by John Wiley & Sons, Canada, 2015.
References 1. L. Solymer & D. Walsh, “Electrical Properties of Materials”, Oxford
University Press, London, 2014.
2. K.H. Jurgen Buschow et. al., Editors-in-chief, “Encyclopedia of
Materials: Science and Technology”, Vol. 4, Elsevier, 2011.
3. A.J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
4. K.M. Gupta, “Electrical and Electronics Engineering Materials”,
Umesh Publications, Delhi, 2006.

Approved By:
_________________ ________________

118 | P a g e
 Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.9.30. Electrical Materials and Technology

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG 3092
Course Title Introduction to Electrical Machines
Degree Program “Electrical Engineering (Focus Area)”, Bachelor of Science
Module Name Basic Electrical Machines
Module Code M33151
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 0 80

Course Objectives and ▪ Explain basic concepts of electromagnetic circuits as they relate to voltages,
Competences to be currents, and physical forces induced in conductors.
Acquired ▪ Explain principles of operation & construction of transformer, induction
machines, D.C. machines and synchronous machines.
▪ Develops analytical models for transformers and electrical rotating machines.
▪ Identify and establish power requirements, power capability, efficiency and
operating characteristics.
Learning outcomes Upon the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
● Illustrate the electromagnetic laws for the operation of Electrical Machines.
● Be able to draw a simple magnetization curve for a ferromagnetic material
and explain the concepts of magnetic saturation and hysteresis.
● Understand and be able to state Faraday’s Law and know that the induced
EMF in a coil is proportional to the rate of change of magnetic flux
through that coil.
● Demonstrate an understanding of basic electrical machine construction
and terminology and be able to explain the operation of a DC machine.
● Describe different types of DC machines like shunt , series and compound
machines.
● Explain the fundamental control practices like starting, reversing and speed
control strategies for different applications.

119 | P a g e
 ● Understand the concept of mutual inductance and for a two winding
transformer be able to draw the equivalent circuit and calculate the
voltage, current and impedance ratio.
● Understand the purpose of the transformer in the practical power system
and also know the importance of parallel operation of the transformer.
● Describe the basic construction and principle and working og of three
phase induction motor
● Understand the advantages of stationary armature in the alternator. what
are the factors affecting the produced emf in the alternator
● Understand the concept of magnetic locking and why the synchronous
motor failed to start in real life.

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description

Week Contact Hrs Course Contents

Unit-I : Magnetic Circuits and Magnetic Materials
1-2 10 introduction, definition of machine, difference between electrical machine and
mechanical machine,Basic laws of magnetic theory, magnetic circuit analysis,
Flux linkage,inductance and Energy, Properties of magnetic materials, Permanent
Magnets, electromagnets,B-H curve.

Unit-II: Principles of Electro mechanical Energy Conversion

3 5 salient aspects of Energy conversion, Energy balance, basic principles of electro-
mechanical energy conversion, Fleming right hand thumb rule, Faraday's laws,
Lenz’s law, induced emf, statically and dynamically induced emf, Forces and
torques in magnetic field systems.

Unit-III: D.C generator

Definition, Construction, Principle of operation, simple loop Dc
4-5 10 generator,generated EMF equation, lap winding and wave winding,Types of DC
generators,shunt, series and compound generators, Characteristics of D.C
generator, OCC characteristics,Voltage regulation of DC generators, problems.
Unit-IV: DC Motor
Definition, construction, principle of operation, back emf and its significance,
6-7 10 Starting of DC motors, purpose of starter, three point starter, torque equation of dc
motor, shaft torque,condition for maximum power,Types of DC motors.
characteristics Dc motors,problems.
Unit-V: Transformers

120 | P a g e
 Definition, purpose, Transformer construction, types of transformer,Principle of
8-9 10 operation, Transformer on No-Load, Ideal Transformer, Real Transformer and
Equivalent Circuit, phasor diagrams,Transformer Testing, Voltage
regulation,losses and Efficiency.

Unit-VI: 3-Phase Induction Machines

AC motor, types, 3 phase induction motor, Construction, production of RMF,
Principle of operation,synchronous speed & slip, rotor and equivalent circuit
(10-12) 15 models,Tests to determine parameter of the equivalent circuit, Power distribution
of an induction motor, torque equation, stall & starting torque, efficiency, torque-
speed-slip curves, speed control methods, starting methods, applications
Pre-requisites Electromagnetic Fields

Co-requisites Electrical Engineering Lab IV

Semester 5/10

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lecture supported by tutorial, assignment and laboratory exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation & Continuous Assessment with Assignment, Tests and Projects (50%),
Grading System
Final examination (50%)
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory for lectures and 100 % is
mandatory for laboratory practice.
▪ Please try to be on time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late
more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book ● P S Bimbhra, “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, 1st Edition,
2011.
● I J Nagrath and D P Kothari, “Electric Machines”, McGraw Hill
Education, 1st Edition, 2010.

121 | P a g e
 ● J B Guptha “Theory and performance of Electrical machines”,
S.K.Kataria & Sons Publishers 14th Edition, 2009.
● G. Mullisa: Introduction to Electrical Machines.

References ● M G Say, E O Taylor, “Direct Current Machines”, Longman Higher

Education, 1st Edition, 1985.
● M G Say, “Performance and design of AC machines”, CBS Publishers,
1st Edition, 2002.
● A E Fitzgerald and C Kingsley, "Electric Machinery”, New York,
McGraw Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2013.
● V.K Mehta, Rohit Mehta, Principle of Electrical Machinery.
● R.K.Rajput, ‘A Textbook of Electrical Machines’, 3rd Edition, Laxmi
Publishers, 2002.
● B.L Theraja, A.K. Theraja,Electrical Technology, S.Chand and Company
LTD,2005.

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.31. Electromagnetic Fields

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering

Course Code ECEG-3051

Course Title Electromagnetic Fields
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Electromagnetism and Electrical Materials
Module Code ECEG-M2091

Module Coordinator XX

Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 0 48

Course Objectives 1. To introduce the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic

vector fields.

122 | P a g e
 2. To impart knowledge on the concepts of electrostatics, electric potential,
energy density and their applications.
3. To impart knowledge on the concepts of magnetostatics, magnetic flux
density, scalar and vector potential and its applications.
4. To impart knowledge on the concepts of Faraday‘s law, induced emf and
Maxwell‘s equations.
5. To impart knowledge on the concepts of Time varying fields.
Competences to be a) Knowledge about the vector calculus and the fundamental laws of physics to
Acquired understand the electric and magnetic fields
b) Problem formulation and analysis of electromagnetic fields in the region
surrounded by different static and moving charge configurations.
Learning outcomes a) Apply vector calculus operations.
b) Develop a knowledge of vector fields and scalar fields.
c) Describe the fundamental nature of static fields, including steady current,
static electric and magnetic fields.
d) Apply Maxwell’s equations and their application to time-harmonic fields,
boundary conditions. And wave equations
e) Knowledge of, physical interpretation, and ability to apply Maxwell’s
equations to determine field waves, potential waves, energy and charge
conservation conditions.
Skills a) An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering
b) Identify, formulate and solve engineering problems.
Course Description This course provides the foundations of electromagnetic theory, with applications in
electrical and electronic engineering. Topics include: electrostatics, Gauss's law,
magnetostatics, Ampere's law, electric and magnetic fields in materials, Faraday's
law of electromagnetic induction, capacitance and inductance in circuit models,
differential and integral forms of Maxwell's equations, boundary field conditions, and
electromagnetic waves.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1&2,3 1. Vector Analysis: Scalar & Vector Fields; Line, Surface, & Volume
Integrals; Gradient of a Scalar field, Divergence & Curl of a Vector Field,
the Divergence & Stokes's Theorems, Laplacian of a Scalar Field; Solenoid
& Irrotational Vector Fields, Helmholtz’s Theorem; Orthogonal Curvilinear
Coordinates
4&5,6 2. Electrostatic Fields: Coulomb's Law, Electric Field E, Electric Flux Density
D; Gauss's Law; Electric Potential V; Relationship between E &V; Electric
Dipole; Energy in Electrostatic Fields.
6&7,8 3. Electric fields in material space and boundary value problems: Current
and Current Density, Continuity of Current, Metallic Conductors, Conductor
Properties and Boundary Conditions, Nature of Dielectric Materials,
Boundary Conditions for Perfect Dielectric Materials, Capacitance, Parallel

123 | P a g e
 Plate Capacitor, Capacitance of a Two-Wire Line, Poisson’s and Laplace’s
Equations, Uniqueness Theorem.

9,10&11 4. Magnetostatics Fields and Forces: Biot-Savart Law, Ampere’s Circuital

Law, Magnetic Flux and Magnetic Flux Density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic
Potentials, Force on a Moving Charge, Force on a Differential Current
element, Force between Differential Current elements, Nature of Magnetic
Materials, Magnetization and Permeability, Magnetic Boundary Conditions,
Potential Energy and Forces on Magnetic Materials, Self-Inductance and
Mutual Inductance.
12&13 5. TIME VARYING FIELDS: Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic Induction
– It’s Integral and Point Forms -Maxwell’s Fourth Equation. Statically and
Dynamically Induced E.M.F’s-Simple Problems. Modified Maxwell’s
Equations for Time Varying Fields-Displacement Current. Wave Equations-
Uniform Plane Wave Motion in Free Space,
Pre-requisites Fundamental of Electrical Engineering

Co-requisites Applied Mathematics III

Semester Year 3, Semester I

Status of Course Core Electrical Engineering

Teaching & Learning Lecture supported by tutorial, assignments, Demonstrations.

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Assignments (10%), Quizzes (10%), Midterm Exam (30%), Final Exam (50%)
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. Principles of Electromagnetics, 6th Edition, Sadiku, Kulkarni, OXFORD
University Press, 2015.
2. Engineering Electromagnetics, William.H.Hayt, Mc.Graw Hill, 2010.

124 | P a g e
 References
Approved By:
_________________
Name (Course instructor)
_________________
Name (Module Coordinator)
8.3.32. Research Methods and Presentation
Course Code
Course Title
Degree Program
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits
Student work load
Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
1. Popovic, Introductory Electromagnetics, (Prentice Hall, 2000).
2. E.C.Jordan and K.G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating
System”2nd ed, PHI, 2000.
________________
Signature
________________
Signature
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
ECEG4270
Research Methods and Presentation
BSc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Internship, Research Method, and Thesis
ECEGM4272
3
Lecture Tutorial Practice/ Laboratory Home study
32 - - 48
To enable students to understand and apply
• Methodologies/techniques and process of doing research projects.
• Presentation skills both in written and oral form with/without the aid of
audiovisual equipment
To enable the students to
• Identify research topics and make literature review
• State research and/or project problems and questions
Students will be able to apply
• Methodologies/techniques and process of doing research projects.
• Presentation skills both in written and oral form with/without the aid of
audiovisual equipment
Students will be able to
• Identify research topics and make literature review
• State research and/or project problems and questions
Research methods: necessity, types and levels of researches; problem
formulation, modeling & experimentation; data collection/generation and
125 | P a g e
 processing; Presentation skills: research and project proposals; oral
presentations formats; applications of audiovisual equipment; Management
aspect of Research and Development (R&D) works and outputs: discussion
forums; intellectual property rights; management of R&D works.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
2 4 1. Basics of Research Methods
• Introduction
• Definition of Research
• Elements of Research
• Essential Features of Research
• Motivation in Research
• Approaches to Research
• Objectives of Research
• Types of Research
2 4 2. The Scientific Method
• The Scientific Method
• Steps in Scientific Method
• Problem, hypothesis, experimentation, interpretation & conclusion,
reporting
• Tools, Techniques and Methods
• Linearized Model of Scientific Method
2 4 3. Research Problem
• Defining Research Problem
• Components of Research Problem
• Selecting the Problem
• Statement of the Problem
• Research questions
• Developing research objectives
1 2 4. Systems and Scientific Modelling
• Introduction
• Modelling
o Scientific model
o Mathematical modelling
o Empirical modelling
3 6 5. Process in Research Proposal Development
• Introduction
• Identifying Research Topic
• Preparing Research Proposal

126 | P a g e
 • Components of Research Proposal
• Introduction, objectives, statement of the problem, methodology,
research design, sampling techniques, data collection, expected
results
• Planning research projects/activities
o Introduction to projects and networks
o Applications of CPM, PERT and the Gant chart
3 6 6. Reporting the results of research study
• Introduction
• Report writing
• Oral presentation
Pre-requisites Senior Standing
Co-requisites
Semester VIII
Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning • Lectures

Methods • Learning by doing: students will be given/propose a mini project (in
group of three students) to work on
• Students will present the work they did
Assessment/Evaluation& Assignments 40%, Test 20%, Final 40 %
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book

References • Jerry R. Thomas, Jack K. Nelson, Stephen J. Silverman, Research

methods in physical activity presentation, package, 5th edition 2005

127 | P a g e
 • C.R Kohtari, Research methodology Method and Techniques, 2nd
revised edition, New age international publishers
• James E. Mauch, Namgi Park, A Guide to the Successful Thesis and
Dissertation A Handbook for Students and Faculty, Fifth Edition, Marcel
Dekker, Inc. New York
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.33. Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering

Course Code ECEG-5322

Course Title Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name EM Waves in Antennas
Module Code ECEG-MXX
Module Coordinator XX

Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
48 - 48 80

Course Objectives 1. To understand the concept of radiation, antenna definitions and significance of
antenna
parameters, to derive and analyse the radiation characteristics of thin wire dipole
antennas
and solve numerical problems.
2. To distinguish between UHF, VHF and Microwave Antennas, their requirements,
Specifications, characteristics and design relations.
3. To identify the antenna array requirements, to determine the characteristics of
ULAs and
estimate the patterns of BSA, EFA, and Binomial Arrays.
4. To analyse the characteristics of yagi-uda antennas, helical antennas, pyramidal
horns,

128 | P a g e
 microstrip patch antennas and parabolic reflectors and identify the requirements to
facilitate their design.
5. To define and distinguish between different phenomenon of wave propagation
(ground wave, space wave and sky wave), their frequency dependence, and estimate
their characteristics, identifying their profiles and parameters involved.
Competences to be Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent
Acquired and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Learning outcomes a) Understand the basic principles of all types of antennas and
b) Analyze different types of antennas designed for various frequency ranges.
c) Become proficient with analytical skills for understanding practical
antennas.
d) Design some practical antennas such as dipole, Yagi - Uda, and horn
antennas.
e) Determine the radiation patterns (in principal planes) of antennas through
measurement setup.
f) Develop technical & writing skills important for effective communication.
Skills (such as on An ability to solve complex Electronics and communication Engineering problems,
software) to acquire or using
required latest hardware and software tools, along with analytical skills to arrive cost
effective and appropriate solutions.
Course Description The course covers the basics of the antenna parameters, retarded potential, radiated
power, radiation resistance, gain and directivity of thin linear wire antennas, VHF,
UHF and microwave antennas like Yagi - Uda, Helical antenna, reflector antenna,
micro strip antenna, and lens antenna, antenna arrays broadside and end fire, antenna
measurements to measure the antenna parameters, wireless communication
maintained through ground, space and sky.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1&2,3 1. Antenna Basics& Dipole Antennas: Introduction, Basic antenna
parameters- patterns, Beam Area, Radiation Intensity, Beam Efficiency,
Directivity-Gain-Resolution, Antenna Apertures, Effective height, Fields
from oscillating dipole, Field Zones, Shape-Impedance considerations,
Polarization-Linear, Elliptical, & Circular polarizations, Antenna
temperature, Antenna impedance, Front–to-back ratio, Radiation – Basic
Maxwell‘s equations, Retarded potential-Helmholtz Theorem, Radiation
from Small Electric Dipole, Half wave Dipole–Current Distributions, Field
Components, Radiated power, Radiation Resistance, Beam width, Natural
current distributions, far fields and patterns of Thin Linear Center-fed
Antennas of different lengths.
4&5 2. VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas I: Loop Antennas - Introduction,
Small Loop, short dipole, Yagi - Uda Arrays, Folded Dipoles & their

129 | P a g e
 characteristics. Helical Antennas-Helical Geometry, Helix modes, Helical
Antenna in Axial and Normal Modes. Horn Antennas- Types.
6&7 3. Antenna Arrays & Measurements: Antenna Arrays & Measurements:
Point sources - Definition, Patterns, arrays of 2 Isotropic sources- Different
cases, Principle of Pattern Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays –
Broadside Arrays, End fire Arrays, EFA with Increased Directivity,
Derivation of their characteristics and comparison, BSA a with Non-uniform
Amplitude Distributions - General considerations and Binomial Arrays,
Illustrative problems. Antenna Measurements: Introduction, Concepts-
Reciprocity, Near and Far Fields, Pattern Measurement Arrangement,
Directivity Measurement, Gain Measurements (by comparison, Absolute and
3-Antenna Methods).

8&9,10 4. VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas II: Micro strip Antennas-
Introduction, features, advantages and limitations, Rectangular patch
antennas- Geometry and parameters, characteristics of Micro strip antennas,
Impact of different parameters on characteristics, Reflector antennas -
Introduction, Flat sheet and corner reflectors, parabola reflectors- geometry,
pattern characteristics, Feed Methods, Reflector Types-Related Features,
Applications.
11&12 5. Wave Propagation: Introduction, Definitions, Characterizations and
general classifications, different modes of wave propagation, Ground wave
propagation-Introduction, Plane earth reflections, Space and surface waves,
wave tilt, curved earth reflections, Space wave propagation - Introduction,
field strength variation with distance and height, effect of earth‘s curvature,
absorption, tropospheric propagation, fading and path loss calculations, Sky
wave propagation -Introduction, structure of Ionosphere, refraction and
reflection of sky waves by Ionosphere, Critical frequency, MUF, LUF, OF,
Virtual height and Skip distance, Relation between MUF and Skip distance,
Multi-HOP propagation.
Pre-requisites EM Waves and Guide Structures

Co-requisites

Semester Year 5, Semester II

Status of Course Core Electronics and communication Engineering

Teaching & Learning Lecturers, Tutorials , Assignments, simulation, laboratories

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Laboratory Experiments (15%), Quizzes (10%), Midterm Exam (25%)
Grading System Final Exam (50%)

130 | P a g e
 Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. C.A. Balanis, “Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design”, Wiley,4/e, 2016.
2. John D. Kraus, Ronald J. Marhefka, Ahmad S. Khan, Antennas and Wave
Propagation‖, TMH, 4thEdition, 2010.
References 3. W.L. Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna Theory and design” 3/e, May
2012
4. E.C. Jordan, K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating
Systems‖, PHI, 2nd Edition,2000.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.34. Data Communication and Computer Networks

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4211

Course Title Data Communication and Computer Networks

Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering

Module Name Computer Networks and Security

Module Code ECEG-MXX

Module Coordinator XX

131 | P a g e
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 16 32 48

Course Objectives 1. Build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of data communication

and computer networking.
2. Understand how errors detected and corrected that occur in transmission
3. How collisions to be handled when many stations share a single channel
4. Know about routing mechanisms and different routing protocols
5. Understand transport layer functions 6. Know about different application layer
protocols
Competences to be • Understand the basic principles of network design.
Acquired • Understand the concept data communication within the network
environment.
• Understand the conflicting issues and resolution techniques in data
transmission.
Learning outcomes 1. Describe the basis and structure of an abstract layered protocol model
2. Independently understand basic computer network technology.
3. Identify the different types of network topologies and protocols.
4. Enumerate the layers of the OSI model and TCP/IP. Explain the functions of
each layer.
5. Identify the different types of network devices and their functions within a
network
6. Understand and building the skills of subnetting and routing mechanisms.
Skills Understand the setting up of a network environment with all the necessary data
communication components, procedure and techniques that make it functional.
Course Description This course is to provide students with an overview of the concepts and
fundamentals of data communication and computer networks. Topics to be
covered include: data communication concepts and techniques in layered network
architecture, error detection and correction mechanisms in Data Link layer,
multiple access protocols, ip addressing, routing in Network layer, different
routing protocols, and concepts of process-to-process delivery in Transport layer,
congestion control techniques, different Application layer protocols and some
modern techniques of communication.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1&2 Introduction to Data communication: Data communication-data
representation, data flow, components. Protocols and

132 | P a g e
 Architectures, Protocol Characteristics, Implementation of
protocols, OSI-ISO 7 Layer-Use of all layers.
3&4 Data Transmission & Encoding: Transmission Media, Encoding
Techniques, Transmission Impairments, DLC and Multiplexing, Error
Detection and Control, Flow Control.
5&6 Computer Networks: Local area network-Definition of node, link,
branch, network, network criteria. Physical structures-types of
connection, working of different network topologies, network
configuration and their advantages, concepts and comparison of
LAN, MAN, WAN wired LANs features and classification. Ethernet-
properties, frame format (IEEE 802.3), addressing, simple problems on
addressing. Access method–CSMA/CD. Token passing LANS-
properties, token bus maintenance and working. Token ring properties,
mechanism. Bluetooth architecture (IEEE 802.15).
7&8 TCP/IP: TCP/IP-Model, protocols layers, INTERNET Address,
logical address, Physical address, UDP/IP Datagram Format, classes
of IP address, Dotted Decimal notation of IP address, basics of IPv4
and IPv6,simple problems on addressing. Address mapping –static
mapping, dynamic mapping. ARP- need, methods, need of RARP
and ICMP. Definition of fragmentation and reassembly. Features of
TCP, relationship between TCP and IP, Subnetting, Masking.
Repeaters/Hubs, Bridges/Switches, Routers.
9,10&11 Routing in Switched Networks: Switching - concepts of circuit
switching, packet switching & message switching and their
applications. Routing in Switched Networks: Introduction to
Routing, Graph Theory - Dijkstra Algorithm, Bellman Ford
Algorithm, Routing Protocols – Distance Vector, Link State IP
addressing.
12&13 Communication protocols: Domain Name System (DNS) -Name
system, Name space, working of DNS server. Email- architecture,
protocols, advantages of IMAP. Basics of FTP, FTP Connections -
Control and Data transfer Connection. Frame relay- Need, Working of
frame relay, ATM- Architecture, characteristics.
Pre-requisites Introduction to Communication Systems

Co-requisites Computer Architectures & Organization

Semester Year 4/II

Status of Course Core Electronics and communication Engineering

133 | P a g e
 Teaching & Learning Lectures, tutorials, and Laboratory exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Practical 10% Assignments 10% Test(s) 30% Final
Examination 50%
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book [1] William Stallings, “Data & Computer Communications” 10th Edition,
2014, Prentice Hall.
[2] Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S. Davie: Computer Networks,
[3] Rita Puz˘manová: Routing and Switching

References [1] Behrouz forouzan, “Introduction to Data Communications &

Networking
[2] Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S. Davie: Computer Networks,
Approved By:
_______________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.35. Communication Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4120
Course Title Communication Systems

Degree Program ECEG4120

Module Name Communication System
Module Code ECEGM4124

134 | P a g e
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 6
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
48 48 0 48

Course Objectives ▪ To introduce students to digital communication systems and its

applications
▪ To enable students to analyze the BER-SNR performance of receivers in
the presence of noise.
▪ To enable the student design optimum receivers;
▪ To study channel equalizers and BER-SNR performance enhancement and
▪ To introduce them to the theory of information and coding.
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on software)

to acquire or required
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

Introduction to Digital Communications: block diagram of digital
communication systems; Merits of Digital Communication Systems;
Examples of Digital Communications.
Information Theory and Source Coding : What is Information;
Information Content; Types of Source Coding- Lossless and Lossy
Source Codes; Design of Example Source Codes- Shannon-Fano Code,
Huffman Code.
Digital Modulation Techniques and Their Performance: Principle,
Constellation, and Signals; Electronic Construction; Noise (BER-SNR)
Performance of Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK), Phase Shift Keying
(PSK), FSK and QAM; Optimum receiver design for digital
modulation
techniques in the presence of noise, mitigation techniques.
Spread Spectrum Communication Systems: Introduction, Types
spread spectrum communication-THSS, FHSS, CSSS; modeling and
design of spread spectrum communication specifically CDMA.

135 | P a g e
 Introduction to MIMO Communication: Introduction- principle,
advantages; Types- Spatial Diversity, Spatial Multiplexing; Modeling
and design of MIMO Systems.
Introduction to Mutli-carrier Communications: Orthogonal signals;
Principle and block diagram of MC communications; Advantages of
MC systems; Limitations of MC systems.
Pre-requisites Introduction to Communications

Co-requisites

Semester II

Status of Course Mandatory

Teaching & Learning This course should be taught with relevant examples on digital Communication
Methods Systems, their components, and BER-SNR performance with and without
channel equalizers. The main teaching method is lecture with practical and
analytical examples. Simulations examples using MatLab should be extensively
used to appraise BER-SNR performance of the various digital communication
systems (modulation techniques). Students should also be given Simulation
project assignment focusing on the various modulation and channel equalization
techniques.
Assessment/Evaluation& Mid Exam (40%), Final Examination (50%), Project assignment (10%), and
Grading System fixed grade scale of the University
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book
References [1.] John G. Proakis and Masoud Salehi, Digital Communications, Mac-Graw
Hill, 2018.
[2.] Bernard Sklar and Fredric Harris, Digital Communications: Fundamentals
and Applications, 2020.

136 | P a g e
 Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.36. Introduction to Photonics

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4122
Course Title Introduction to Photonics
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Communication System
Module Code ECEGM4134
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5/3
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 0 80
Course Objectives The main objectives of the course are (i) to study the propagation of optical waves
mainly focusing on diffraction, (ii) to study the polarization of optical waves, (iii) to
learn the superposition of wave and optical interference, (iv) to study the basics,
characteristics and properties of photo and laser (communication) devices; (v) to
study laser operations and optical processing for communications.
Competences to be The main competences the students will acquire in this course are:
Acquired • Analysis of optical propagation using Maxwell equations for
information transmission
• Characterizing and designing of photo and laser (communication)
devices;
• Computer modeling and analysis of optical and laser devices;
• Writing technical report on optical devices and measurement
system;
• Identifying common photo and laser devices;
• Working in team on engineering assignments
Learning outcomes After taking this course, students should be able to:
• Analyze propagation of optical waves using Maxwell equations;
• Characterizing photo and laser devices;

137 | P a g e
 • Design photo and laser communication networks;
• Specify the operational parameters of photo and laser devices;
• Specify the system parameters of optical processing systems.
Skills (such as on The students will be acquainted with a relevant optical (photo and laser) device
software) to acquire or modeling software, such as Photonic Simulation Software (PSS).
required
Course Description The course provides an introduction to photonics, optoelectronics, lasers and fiber-
optics. It begins by analysing optical propagation, reflection, and refraction at
media interfaces and optics in anisotropic media. Further, the course covers
polarization, with application to liquid crystal displays (LCDs) and waveplates. In
addition, anti-reflection coatings, dielectric mirrors, and interferometers should be
studied. Subsequently, dielectric waveguides and fiber optics are studied, together
with methods of modulating radiation for communications and measurement. Then,
optical spectral analysis, filtering, resonators, lasers and coherence are covered.
Finally, semiconductor optics, i.e. laser diodes, LED, photo-detectors, and
communication systems should be covered.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
Chapter 1: Light as EM Wave
• Wave equations;
• Harmonic waves;
• Electromagnetic waves (Review);
• Energy flow and absorption;
• Fiber optics;
• Matrix analysis of polarization;
• Reflection and refraction at dielectric interfaces;
• Polarization phenomena and devices.
Chapter 2: Superposition of Waves and Interference
• Two-beam interference and interferometry;
• Multi-wave interference;
• Fabry-Perot interferometer;
• Group/phase velocity and dispersion.
Chapter 3: Diffraction
• Fraunhofer diffraction;
• Diffraction grating;
• Fresnel diffraction
Chapter 4: Photon and Laser
• Photon properties;
• Laser basics;
• Characteristics of laser beams;
138 | P a g e
 • Photo devices;
• Laser devices.
Chapter 5: Laser operation
• Rate equations;
• Gain media;
• Steady-state laser operation;
• Laser line broadening;
• Pulsed operation
• Laser devices
Chapter 6: Optical Processing
• Frequency mixing (light modulation);
• Spectral analysis;
• Filtering;
• Second harmonic generation;
• Electro-optic effects;
• Faraday effects;
• Acoustic-optic effect.
Pre-requisites Applied Modern Physics

Co-requisites

Semester

Status of Course Mandatory

Teaching & Learning This course should be taught with relevant examples from optical devices and
Methods communication systems, their components, and applications. The main teaching
method is lecture with practical and analytical examples. Illustrative examples on
the application of Maxwell equations to optical propagation, optical and laser
devices, and modulation are essential. Students should also be given assignments
focusing on the properties of optical components, modulations, and design.
Assessment/Evaluation& Mid Exam (40%), Final Examination (50%), Project assignment (10%), and fixed
Grading System grade scale of the University
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.

139 | P a g e
 ▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book

References [1.] Bahaa E. A. Saleh and Malvin Carl Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, 2019

[2.] A. Yariv, P. Yeh, "Photonics: Optical Electronics in Modern Communication",

6th edition, Oxford University Press, 2007
[3.] B.E.A. Saleh and M.C. Teich, "Fundamentals of Photonics", 2nd edition,
Wiley-Interscience, 2007.
[4.] G.R. Fowles, "Introduction to Modern Optics", Dover, 2nd edition, 1989.
[5.] M. Born and E. Wolf, "Principles of Optics", Cambridge, 7th edition, 1999.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.37. Optics and Optical Communication

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5122
Course Title Optics and Optical Communication
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering (Electronic Communication), Bachelor of
Science
Module Name Communication System
Module Code ECEGM4134
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5 ECTS
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 0 32 80

Course Objectives and On successful completion of this course the students will be able to
Competences to be Acquired

140 | P a g e

Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
2 6
2 6
3 9
▪ Understanding a historical overview of optical fibers and optical fiber
communications and describe essential elements of optical fiber
communications link
▪ Define modes of propagation and index profile and optical fiber
configuration types
▪ Understand and get familiarized with the operating principle of optical
sources
▪ Understand the basic operation and characteristics of photodetectors
▪ Explain the design parameters and analyze sensitivity and noise
performance aspects of optical receivers
▪ Describe principle of operation, basic structure types, and performance
parameters of semiconductor optical amplifiers (SOAs)
• Understand the concept of amplification, performance parameters and
uses of Raman fiber amplifiers (RFAs) and Erbium-doped fiber
amplifiers (EDFAs)
▪ Understand the need of dispersion compensating and management in
optical fiber communications
▪ Describe the principle and understand configuration of wavelength
division multiplexing (WDM) system
At the end of the course the students familiarize with optical communication
network , components and optical link design.
This course provides an overview of fiber optic fiber communications system
optical transmitter and receivers, WDM techniques, optical amplifiers and
dispersion compensation techniques
Course Contents
Chapter 1 .Introduction to Fiber Optics Communications
Historical Development, Electromagnetic Spectrum, Need of Optical Fiber
Communications ,Light Wave System and components, Optical Fibers as a
Communication Channel, Advantages of Optical Fiber Cables and Applications
Chapter 2. Transmission Characteristics of Optical Fibers
Introduction, Ray Theory and Concept of Optical Propagation, Refractive
index model and index profile of fiber, Propagation modes, Attenuation and
Material Absorption losses, Linear and Nonlinear Scattering Losses, Fiber
Bend Loss, Type of Dispersion in fibers and its limitations, Polarization
Chapter 3. Optical Sources and Transmitters
141 | P a g e
 Bandgap structure of semiconductor, Requirement of optical sources, Edge
emitting LED and Surface emitting LED (SLED) structure, Optical power and
bandwidth, Laser diode operation and characteristics, Optical transmitter,
Modulation Techniques, Coupling and data conversion

3 9 Chapter 4. Optical Receivers

Basic concepts, Common photodetector in an optical receiver, Receiver Design

, Receiver Noise and Bit‐Error Rate, Coherent Detection, Receiver Sensitivity,
degradation and Performance

2 6 Chapter 5. Optical Amplifiers

Basic concept of optical Amplifiers, Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers (SOA),

Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers,Fabry–Perot laser amplifier operation,Raman
and Brillouin fiber amplifier,Amplifier Noise and optical SNR,Amplifier System
Applications

2 6 Chapter 6. Dispersion Management Techniques

Dispersion, Dispersion Compensating Fibers (DCF), Chromatic dispersion

compensation, Fiber Bragg Grating, Applications of DCF in optical fiber
communication link

3 6 Chapter 7. Wavelength‐division Multiplexing (WDM ) System

Principle of operation of a WDM system,Tunable optical and Fabry–Perot filter,

Wavelength multiplexer (MUX) and demultiplexer (DEMUX), Arrayed–
Waveguide Grating (AWG), Add–Drop MUX (ADM) using FBG, WDM
Systems and Networks ,Time‐Division Multiplexing, Subcarrier Multiplexing
and Code‐Division Multiplexing

Pre-requisites Communication System

Co-requisites

Semester II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lecturers, tutorials, laboratories, Exercises and Assignments

Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Mid Exams (25%), Quizzes (5%), Assignments (10%) and laboratory
Grading System evaluation (10%) and Final Examination (50%)
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.

142 | P a g e

Text book
References
Approved By:
_________________
Name (Course instructor)
_________________
Name (Module Coordinator)
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
1. Agrawal, Govind P. Fiber-optic communication systems. Vol. 222. 4th
Edition,John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
1. Keiser, Gerd. Optical fiber communications. Vol. 2. 4th Edition New
York: McGraw-Hill, 2000.
2. Senior, John M., and M. Yousif Jamro. Optical fiber communications:
principles and practice. 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Singal, Tarsem Lal. Optical fiber communications: principles and
applications. Cambridge University Press, 2016.
________________
Signature
________________
Signature

8.3.38. EM Waves and Guide Structures

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4140
Course Title EM Waves and Guide Structures
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering (Communication Major)
Module Name RF Waves, Propagation, and Antenna
Module Code ECEGM4144
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory

143 | P a g e

Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
32 16 0 48
▪ To understand time-varying electromagnetic (EM) fields and waves;
▪ To derive and study the governing equations of EM wave propagation;
▪ To learn the basics and design of radio frequency (RF) transmission
lines, strip lines and microstrip lines, and rectangular waveguides;
▪ To gain insight into the applications of RF transmission lines and
waveguides.
▪ To be acquainted with software methods for solutions to Maxwell
equations and propagation.
The students will acquire the following skills:
• Analysis of guided structures using complex phasors;
• Modeling and analysis of guided structures, such as wired and stripline
transmission lines and waveguides using software;
• Writing engineering report
The students can:
• Solve Maxwell equations for propagation of EM waves in unguided
lossy and lossless dielectric media;
• Solve Maxwell equations for propagation of EM waves in free space
and perfect conductor;
• Solve Maxwell equations for propagation of EM waves from one
medium to another with known boundary conditions;
• Analyze and design transmission line structures for the propagation of
EM waves in RF communication systems with the use of Maxwell
equations;
• Analyze and design waveguide structures for the propagation of EM
waves in RF communication systems with the use of Maxwell
equations.
• Model and analyze propagation of EM waves in guided structures
using computer software
Get a hand on skill in propagation software such as FDTD or WinProp.
Course Contents
Chapter 1: Mathematics Review and Maxwell’s Equations:
▪ Mathematical Reviews of Vectors Operations and Complex
Variables;
▪ Maxwell’s Equations;
▪ Boundary Conditions;
144 | P a g e
▪ Time Harmonic Fields and Phasor Methods of Solutions to
Maxwell’s Equations.
Chapter 2: Electromagnetic Wave Propagation in Unguided
Media:
▪ Introduction;
▪ Waves in General;
▪ EM Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics;
▪ Plane EM Waves in Free Space;
▪ Plane EM Waves in Lossless Dielectrics;
▪ Plane EM Waves in Good Conductors;
▪ Electromagnetic Wave Power and the Poynting Vector;
▪ Refection of Plane EM Waves at Normal and Oblique Incidence.
Chapter 3: Electromagnetic Waves in Classical Transmission
Lines:
▪ Transmission Line Model;
▪ Transmission Line Equations;
▪ Input Impedance, Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR), and
Power;
▪ Impedance Matching using Smith Chart;
▪ Some Application of Transmission Lines.
Chapter 4: Electromagnetic Waves in Planar Microstrip Lines:
▪ Introduction;
▪ Substrates;
▪ Planner Line Structures;
▪ Modelling of Transmission Lines;
▪ Microstrip Transmission Lines;
▪ Microstrip Line Design;
▪ Stripe Lines;
▪ Introduction to Unique Transmission Line Effects; Basics of
Transmission Line Coupling.
Chapter 5: Waveguides:
▪ Introduction;
▪ Rectangular Wave Equations;
▪ Parallel-Plate Waveguides-
• Transverse Magnetic (TM) Modes,
• Transverse Electric (TE) Modes;
▪ Rectangular Waveguides-
• TM Mode,
• TE Mode,

145 | P a g e
 • Practical Rectangular Waveguides;
▪ Rectangular Waveguide Components;
▪ Coplanar Waveguides.
▪ Waveguide cavities
Pre-requisites ECEG3051: Electromagnetic Fields, ECEG4111:Introduction to
Communication System
Co-requisites None

Semester II

Status of Course Mandatory

Teaching & Learning Methods This course should be taught with relevant examples from applications of EM
Waves and guide structures in communication system. The main teaching
method is lecture with practical and analytical examples to be followed by
class exercises and tutorials to solve them. Students should also be given
project assignment on stripe line or waveguide or transmission line
components designs with computer method to Maxwell’s equations.
Assessment/Evaluation& Mid Exam (40%), Final Examination (50%), Project assignment (10%), and
Grading System fixed grade scale of the University
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value
in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book

References [1.] Michael Steer, Microwave and RF Design: Transmission Lines, NC State
University, Third Edition, 2019.
[2.] Matthew Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, Oxford University
Press, 2018.
[3.] William Hayt and John Buck, Engineering Electromagnetics, 9th ed.,
McGraw-Hill, 2018.

146 | P a g e
 [4.] David J. Griffiths, Introduction to Electrodynamics, 2017.
[5.] Subal Kar, Microwave Engineering: Microwave Engineering:
Fundamentals, Design, and Applications, Universities Press, 2016.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.39. Microelectronic Devices and Circuits

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4250

Course Title Microelectronic Devices and Circuits

Degree Program B.SC.
Module Name Microelectronic Systems

Module Code ECEGM4258

Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 16 32 80

Course Objectives ▪ To understand the basic concepts in realization of microelectronic devices and
circuits;
▪ To understand and design microelectronic systems;
▪ To be able to effectively model and design microelectronic systems and
networks
▪ To familiarize with small signal models and analysis of diodes, MOSFET, and
BJT.
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes After successful completion of the course, the students are able to:
▪ Design and simulate microelectronic circuits using simulation software like
Multisim and PisPice.
▪ Demonstrate knowledge on rectifier design and analysis.
▪ Understand the advantage and limitations of small signal modelling

147 | P a g e
 ▪ Appreciate the application of diodes, MOSFET and BJT devices in the RF
circuits and devices.
▪ Apply the concept of small-signal modelling and analysis in microelectronic
device and circuit design.
▪ Make AC/DC analysis of MOS and BJT devices
▪ Design logic gates from CMOS inverters.
Skills (such as on Students are able to design, simulate and interpret the result in a simulation software
software) to acquire or like Multisim and PisPice.
required
Course Description In this course, the topics to be covered include modelling of microelectronic
devices, basic microelectronic circuit analysis and design, physical electronics
of semiconductor junction and MOS devices, relation of electrical behaviour to
internal physical processes, development of circuit models, and understanding
the uses and limitations of various models. The course uses incremental and
large-signal techniques to analyse and design of bipolar and field effect
transistor circuits, with examples chosen from digital circuits, single-ended
and differential linear amplifiers. This course also introduces the basic RF circuits
and devices and their principle of operations.

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

1. Boltzmann diode model
• Introduction
• Terminal Characteristics of Junction Diode
• Diode Modeling Techniques
• Modelling the Diode Forward Characteristic
• Operation in the Reverse Breakdown Region—Zener Diodes
2. Design of rectifier circuit and computer aided analysis
• Introduction
• Types of rectifier circuit and their principle of operations
• Peak Rectifiers
• Non-linear application od Diodes
• Special Diode Types and Their Applications

3. MOS Field-Effect Transistors (MOSFETs)

• Device Structure and Physical Operation
• NMOS and PMOS transistor operating principles
• Current—Voltage Characteristics
• MOSFET Circuits at DC
• Modelling the MOSFET in Amplifier Design
• Small-Signal Operation and Models

148 | P a g e
 • Biasing in MOS Amplifier Circuits
• Principle of Operation of Depletion Type MOSFETs
• Design of CMOS inverter and CMOS logic circuits
• Design and Simulation of BJT models
4. Introduction to RF Circuits and Systems
• Matching and biasing networks: impedance matching and
quality factor; amplifier classes of operation and biasing networks
• RF passive and active components mainly filters.
• RF transistor amplifier design: characteristics, configurations,
amplifier matching, efficiency, preamplifiers.
• RF oscillators: low phase noise oscillator; HF frequency oscillator
configurations; voltage controlled oscillator (VCO); crystal
oscillator; phase locked loop (PLL)
• RF mixer: characteristics of a mixer; active mixers; image reject
mixer; harmonic mixers; frequency converters
• RF detectors: diode detector, power detector.

Pre-requisites ECEG3052:Electrical Materials and Technology, ECEG3071: Applied

Electronics II
Co-requisites

Semester 2nd semester

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Lectures, tutorials, assignments, simulation laboratory and paper work
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Assignment and Quizzes 15%, Simulation laboratory test and report 15%,
Grading System Test 20%, Final examination 50%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade

149 | P a g e
 ▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.

Text book Sedra, Adel S. and Kenneth C. Smith, Microelectronic circuits, Seventh edition,
2015.
References 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, Microelectronic Circuits Analysis and Design,
2016, Second Edition.
2. Behzad Razavi, Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Second Edition, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., 2014.
3. Richard C. Jaeger, Travis N. Blalock , Microelectronic circuit design.,
2011, 4th edition
4. Clifton G. Fonstad, Microelectronic Devices and Circuits, 2006 Electronic
Edition
5. M. H. Rashid, SPICE for Circuits and Electronics using PSpice, Prentice
Hall, 1995.

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.40. Microwave Devices and Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5141
Course Title Microwave Devices and Systems
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering (Communication focus Area)
Module Name RF Waves, Propagation, and Antenna
Module Code ECEGM4144
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 8 8 48

Course Objectives ▪ Appreciate the use of microwave devices and systems that they come
across in their carriers and daily life.
▪ To understand the application of microwave devices and systems;

150 | P a g e

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
▪ To study microwave networks, their characteristic parameters, and
matching network design,
▪ To study passive microwave devices,
▪ To study active microwave devices
The main skills students will acquire in this course are:
• Designing of passive microwave devices;
• Computer modeling and analysis of microwave passive and
active devices, particularly using EDA;
• Writing technical report on advanced microwave
communication and measurement system;
• Testing common passive and active microwave devices;
• Working in team on engineering assignments
After taking this course, students should be able to:
• Analyze passive microwave devices and networks using
scattering parameters;
• Analyze active microwave devices and networks;
• Design passive microwave devices and networks;
• Design active microwave devices and networks;
• Specify the operational parameters of passive microwave
devices and networks;
• Specify the operational parameters of active microwave
devices and networks;
The students will be acquainted with microwave circuit modeling software
such as EDA, Microwave Office.
Course Contents
Chapter 1: Microwave Network Analysis and Scattering Matrix:
▪ Introduction;
▪ The EM Spectrum;
▪ Applications of Microwave Engineering;
▪ Microwave Networks and S-parameter Formulation;
▪ Properties of S-parameters;
▪ S-Parameters Simplifications of Selected Microwave
Devices
Chapter 2: Microwave Transmitter and Receiver:
▪ Microwave Communications Systems;
▪ Block diagram of digital microwave communication
systems;
151 | P a g e
 ▪ Microwave Transmitter and Receiver components-Mixers,
Filters, Amplifiers, Oscillators, Frequency Shifters, Tuners,
Attenuators, Duplexers;
▪ Examples of Microwave Communication Systems-
LTE/WiMax, IEEE802.11, Satellite Systems, GNNS
Systems
▪ Introduction to Software Defined Radio
Chapter 3: Microwave Passive Circuit Devices:
▪ Introduction;
▪ Waveguide and planar transmission line based components-
• Terminations,
• T-junctions,
• Tuners,
• Directional couplers,
• Attenuators,
• Isolators,
• Circulators,
• Phase Shifter,
• Bends and Corners,
• Waveguide twist and adapters,
• Flanges and connectors;
▪ S-Matrix Analysis of selected microwave components-
Directional coupler, Majic T, Circulator.
Chapter 4: Microwave of Active Devices:
▪ Introduction;
▪ Microwave Tubes- Klystron, TWT, Magnetron;
▪ Microwave Semiconductor Devices;
▪ Microwave Diodes-Schottky diode, PIN diode, Gunn diode, IMPAT
diode;
▪ Microwave transistors- MESFET, HEMT, and HBT devices;
▪ Microwave Semiconductor Oscillators, amplifiers and power
combiners- Oscillators/amplifier with diodes,
▪ Oscillators/Amplifiers with transistors;
▪ Power combiners with IMPATT and Gunn diodes.
Chapter 5: Microwave Measurement Techniques:
▪ Introduction;
▪ Impedance Measurement at Microwave frequencies-SWD technique,
Voltage Minima Technique;
▪ Detection and Measurement of Power at microwave; frequencies;

152 | P a g e
 ▪ Microwave power detector;
▪ Bolometer technique of microwave power measurement;
▪ Microwave power meter;
▪ Peak power measurement;
▪ Measurement of Quality (Q) factor of microwave cavities (optional);
▪ Microwave Frequency Measurement;
▪ Measurement of Noise Figure and Phase Noise;
▪ Fundamentals of Spectrum Analyzers;
▪ Fundamentals of Network Analyzers.
Chapter 6: Introduction to Meta-Materials
▪ This is a newly coming up topic that is demonstrated to bring about
new wireless communication paradigm.
▪ Topics include meta-atoms; meta-surfaces; electric resonators;
magnetic resonators; meta information surfaces. .
Pre-requisites ECEG4140, EM Waves and Guide Structures

Co-requisites None

Semester I

Status of Course Mandatory

Teaching & Learning Methods
Assessment/Evaluation&
Grading System
Course policy
This course should be taught with relevant examples from Microwave
Communication Systems, their components, and applications. The main
teaching method is lecture with practical and analytical examples. Numerical
examples on the use of S-parameters to specify and design microwave
components is essential. Students should also be given project assignment
focusing in microwave measurement techniques and equipment.
Mid Exam (40%), Final Examination (50%), Project assignment (10%), and
fixed grade scale of the University
▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value
in your grade

153 | P a g e
 ▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.

Text book

References [1.] Subal Kar, Microwave Engineering: Fundamentals, Design, and

Applications, Universities Press, 2016.
[2.] Michael Steer, Microwave and RF Design: Networks, NC State
University, Third Edition, 2019.
[3.] David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, John Wiley, Fourth Edition,
2011.
[4.] Michael Steer, Microwave and RF Design: Amplifiers and Oscillators,
NC State University, Third Edition, 2019.
[5.] Michael Steer, Microwave and RF Design: Modules, NC State
University, Third Edition, 2019
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature

_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.41. Computer Architecture and Organization

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG3143
Course Title Computer Architecture and Organization
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Computer Architecture and Programming
Module Code ECEG-M3143
Module Coordinator

Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 48

Course Objectives 1. To introduce the architecture and organization of a computer system and its
components
2. To design and simulate a basic computer system
3. Understand the architecture of a modern computer with its various processing
units. Also performance measurement of the computer system.

154 | P a g e
 4. In addition to this the memory management system of computer.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes 1. Students can understand the architecture of modern computer.
2. They can analyze the Performance of a computer using performance equation.
3. Understanding of different instruction types.
4. Students can calculate the effective address of an operand by addressing modes.
5. They can understand how computer stores positive and negative numbers.
6. Understanding of how a computer performs arithmetic operation of positive and
negative numbers.
Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description This course aims at developing students to know General Introduction; Review of
Digital Components; The Central Processing Unit: Architecture and Instruction Set;
Instruction Format and Addressing Modes; Register Transfer Descriptions;
Organization of the Arithmetic and Logic Unit; The Control Unit Realization:
Hardwired and Micro programmable; The Memory Hierarchy and Memory
Management; Input-Output Devices; Software of a Computer System; High
Performance Computers; Design of a Small Computer System.
Week Cr.Hrs Course Contents
1. General Introduction: Organization and architecture, Computer evolution,
Review of digital components (IC‘s, Decoders, Multiplexers, Registers, Shift
Registers)
2. The Central Processing Unit: Basic operational concepts, Bus structures,
General register organization, Stack organization, Instruction format,
Addressing modes, Data transfer & manipulation.
3. Register Transfer and Micro Operations: Register transfer language, Bus
and memory interface, Arithmetic micro operations, Logic micro operations,
Shift micro operations, Addressing modes.
4. Organization of Arithmetic and Logic Unit: Addition and subtraction,
Multiplication algorithms, Division algorithms, Floating point arithmetic,
Decimal arithmetic unit, Interrupt-driven.
5. The Control Unit Realization: Hard wired and micro programmable
instruction codes, Instruction cycles, Memory reference instructions, Input
output & interrupt, Control memory, Microprogram example.
6. The Memory Hierarchy and The Memory Management: Basic memory
circuits, Characteristics of Memory systems, Memory hierarchy, Main
memory, Auxiliary memory, Associative memory, Cache memory, Virtual
memory.

155 | P a g e
 7. Input – Output Devices: Peripheral devices, Input output interface,
Asynchronous data transfer, Modes of transfer, Priority interrupt, Direct
memory access (DMA). Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Bus,
Universal Serial Bus (USB).
Pre-requisites ECEG-3141: Digital Logic Design
Co-requisites
Semester
Status0 of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning
Lectures supported by Tutorials and exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Quiz, Assignments, Mid Exam, Final Exam
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. Computer Organization, Carl Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, Safea Zaky, 5th
Edition, McGraw Hill.
2. Computer Architecture and Organization , John P. Hayes ,3rd Edition, McGraw
Hill.
References 1. Computer Organization and Architecture – William Stallings Sixth Edition,
Pearson/PHI
2. Structured Computer Organization – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, 4th Edition
PHI/Pearson
3. Fundamentals or Computer Organization and Design, - Sivaraama Dandamudi
Springer Int. Edition.
4. “Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware/Software Interface” by
David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy.
5. J .P. Hayes, "Computer Architecture and Organization", McGraw-Hill, 1998.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature

156 | P a g e
 _________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.42. Embedded Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4150
Course Title Embedded Systems
Degree Program BSc
Module Name
Module Code
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
2 1 2 3

Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes At the end of this course student will:
Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
The objective of this course is to equip the students with the basic concepts of
embedded system, applications in which they are used, 8051 microcontroller
programming concepts and various aspects of embedded system design from
Hardware and Software points of view and it describes tools and
methodologies needed for embedded system design. It provides RTOS
concepts for coding the embedded system software routines. It tells what makes
a system a real-time system and describes the characteristics of latency in real-
time systems.
1. Understand the Embedded processor architecture and its components used
in embedded systems
2. Write the 8051 assembly language code for specific purposes
3. Implement code for interfacing various devices.
4. Develop simple embedded systems for real time operations
5. Compose simple embedded system with error free software to obtain target
system

157 | P a g e
Course Description

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

1. Introduction:
Why Study Embedded System, Contrast between embedded
systems and other computer systems, role and purpose of
embedded systems
2. Embedded Microcontrollers:
Structure of a basic computer system, CPU families used in
microcontrollers, 8051 Micro controller Hardware, Basic I/O
devices and technologies, Interrupts and Memories.
3. Embedded Programming Concepts:
Program translation process, representation of programs and their
execution flow, Fundamentals of assembly language and linking,
Programming Tools and Techniques, Addressing Modes, External
Data Moves, Programming the 8051.
4. Applications and Interfacing: Introduction, keyboards, Human Factor,
Key Switch Factors, Keyboard Configurations, Displays, Seven-Segment
Numeric Display, D/A and A/D Conversions.
5. Low-power Computing:
Sources of energy consumption, instruction level strategies for
power
management, memory system power consumption, system-level
power management
6. Real-time Operating systems:
Context switching mechanisms, scheduling policies, message
passing and shared memory communications, inter process
communication
7. Reliable System Design:
Failures in hardware, sources of errors from software, design
verification and its role, fault-tolerant techniques, Design
Methodologies and Tools Design Methodology, RTOS Tools,
Logic analyzers, Compilers and Programming environments,
Software management Tools
Pre-requisites

Co-requisites

Semester

Status of Course

158 | P a g e
 Teaching & Learning
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation&
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. An Embedded Software Primer, David E. Simon, Pearson Education.
2. The 8051 Microcontroller, Third Edition, Kenneth J.Ayala, Thomson
3. Micro Controllers, Ajay V Deshmukh, Tata McGraw hill Publishers.
References 1. Arnold S. Berger: Embedded Systems Design
2. Stuart R. Ball: Embedded Microprocessor Systems: Real World Design
3. Michael Barr: Programming Embedded Systems in C and C ++
Approved By:
________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.43. Microcomputers and Interfacing

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4161
Course Title Microcomputers and Interfacing
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Microcomputer and Interfacing
Module Code ECEG-M4161
Module Coordinator

Lecturer

159 | P a g e
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 16 32 80

Course Objectives 1. The objective of this course is to become familiar with the architecture and the
instruction set of an Intel microprocessor.
2. Assembly language programming will be studied as well as the design of various
types of digital and analog interfaces.
3. Understand the architecture of 8085.
4. Understand and handle interrupts.
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
• 1. Recall and apply a basic concept of digital fundamentals to Microprocessor based
personal computer system.
• 2. Identify a detailed s/w & h/w structure of the Microprocessor.
• 3. Illustrate how the different peripherals (8255, 8253 etc.) are interfaced
with Microprocessor.
• 4. Distinguish and analyze the properties of Microprocessors & Microcontrollers.
• 5. Analyze the data transfer information through serial & parallel ports.
• 6. Train their practical knowledge through laboratory experiments.
Skills (such as on 8085 Microprocessor Kit, 8085 Programming Software.
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description The Microcomputers and interfacing course intends in getting the concepts to the
mastering of basic microcontroller and microcomputers. The discussion of the course
will be based around the 8085 intel-microprocessor. However, this is not stiff and
could be subjected to change. The fact that the 8085 is the considered basic processor
architecture, only for those matters will the discussion is based on the
microcontroller. The discussion of the course will begin by introducing the
microcontroller evolution in their historical background. The art of bringing hardware
and software together will be explored. The two most common computer
architectures, the Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC) and the Complex
Instruction Set Computing (CISC) will also be explained. The overall 8085
architecture with a close look at the register, memory, bus, and IO organization.
Having discussed the concept of the architecture, the course will then pass to getting
to know with the instruction sets of the 8085. The most important instruction set will
be given emphasis and soon after that, hardware programming will be taught. The
hardware programming or the storing of a program will take two tours. The first will
be assembly language programming route and the second will be high level hardware
programming. The high level language programming can take various languages into
the programming task. C and C++ are the most common ones. Subroutines and

160 | P a g e
 interrupts shall be handled in programming to enable students get the art of real time
applications. Next shall be the skill of interfacing microcontrollers with various
peripherals devices that help bring up real applications. Finally bringing all things
together, students will be made able to design microcomputers for various devices.
This will help them in developing hardware based controllers in embedded concepts.
Week Cr.Hrs Course Contents
1. Introduction to Microprocessor and Computer: History of Microprocessor,
Evolution of Intel Processors. 8085 Architecture: Features of 8085, Architecture
of 8085, Pin Configuration of 8085 and Bus Organization.
2. 8085 Instruction set and Assembly Language Programming: Basic
Instruction set of 8085, Addressing Modes and Assembly Language
Programming.

3. Looping, Counting, Time Delays and Code Conversion: Looping, Counting

and Indexing, Timers, Code Conversion, BCD Arithmetic.
4. 8085 Interrupts: Necessity of Interrupts, Classification of Interrupt, Maskable
and Non Maskable Interrupts, Vectored Interrupts, Nested Interrupts, 8085
Interrupt structure and operation, Interrupt Timing, Interrupt Driven I/O.
5. Memory and I/O Interfacing & Applications: Basic concepts in Memory
Interfacing, Basic I/O interfacing Concepts, 8251 Serial I/O, 8255 Programming
Peripheral Interface, DMA, Interfacing ADC and DAC, Traffic Light Control
application.
6. Bus Standards: Introduction to communication interfaces, RS 232C,
Handshaking methods, RS 422-A, RS 485, I2C, GPIB (IEEE 488) Bus.
7. Introduction to Microcontrollers: Microcontroller, Structure of
Microcontroller, Difference between microprocessor and microcontroller,
Generation of microcontrollers.
Pre-requisites ECEG-3143: Computer Architecture and Organization
Co-requisites
Semester IV Year I Semester
Status of Course Core Electrical and Computer Engineering
Teaching & Learning
Lectures supported by Tutorials and exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation& Quiz, Assignments, Mid Exam, Final Exam
Grading System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.

161 | P a g e
 ▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according
to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class.
I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book 1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microcomputer Systems: The 8080/8085 Family
Architecture, Programming and Design”, Galgotia Publications.
2. A.P Godse, D.A. Godse, “Microprocessors and its applications”, Technical
Publications, Pune, India, 2008.
3. Douglas V. Hall, “Microprocessor and Interfacing”, prentiee hall.
References 1. Andrew N. Sloss “ARM System Developer's Guide” MK publishers, 2004

2. Richard C. Detmer “X86 Assembly language and Computer Architecture”, Jones

and Bartlett pub., 2001

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.44. Algorithm Analysis and Design

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5172
Course Title Algorithm Analysis and Design
Degree Program BSc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Programming Concepts & Software
Module Code ECEGM4175
Module Coordinator Engineering
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Laboratory/Practical Home Study
32 32 - 80
Course Objectives • To discuss and exemplify algorithm analysis methods
• To provide basic knowledge of algorithm design techniques
• To discuss the advantages and disadvantages of various algorithms.
• To describe the design and performance of various searching and sorting algorithms.
Competences to be
Acquired

162 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5172
Course Title Algorithm Analysis and Design
• The student will have a basic knowledge of algorithm analysis and design
techniques
• The students will be able to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of
various algorithms
Learning outcomes
• The students will be able describe the design and performance of various
searching and sorting algorithms.
• The student will be able to choose optimal algorithm to solve a problem at
hand
Skills (such as on
• The students extend their previous programming skills.
software) to acquire or
• The students master algorithm analysis and design techniques
required

Course Description .

Week Contact Course Contents

Hrs
2 10 1. Algorithm analysis basics
1.1. The running time of a program
• Big Oh, Omega and Theta notations
• Lower bounds
• Worst and average case analysis
• Time and space trade-off
1.2. The RAM model
1.3. Comparison of Algorithms (Big-O, B Notations)
1.4. Recurrences
• The substitution method
• The recursion-tree method
• Master Method
2 10 2. Analysis of Sorting and Searching algorithms
2.1. Analysis of Simple Algorithms
• sorting, searching
2.2. Analysis of Advanced Algorithms:
• advanced trees, heaps, hash tables
2 10 3. Algorithm design techniques

• Divide and-conquer
• Dynamic programming

163 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5172
Course Title Algorithm Analysis and Design
• Greedy algorithms
• Backtracking Algorithm
• Amortized Analysis

2 10 4. Algorithms for fundamental graph problems

• Depth-first Search
• Breadth-first Search
• Connected Components,
• Topological Sort
• Shortest Paths.

2 10 5. String processing algorithms

• The naive string-matching algorithm

• The Rabin-Karp algorithm
• String matching with finite automata

2 10 6. Problem complexity and type

• Complexity of problems
• Tractable and intractable problems

1 5 7. Chapter Introduction to parallel computation

ECEG3101: Object Oriented Programming

Pre-requisites
ECEG4160: Data Structures
Co-requisites
Semester X
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning
Lectures, Lab, tutorial, class exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation&
Assignments 20%, Test 30%, Final 50 %
Grading System
• All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
Course policy
• Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated

164 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5172
Course Title Algorithm Analysis and Design
• Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
• You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the time table indicated.
• 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I will
not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
• Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
• Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.

Text book

1. Data Structures and Algorithms, Mark.A.Weiss,3rd ed, Pearson Education,2012

2. Data Structures and Algorithms in Java,M.T. Goodrich and R. Tamassia, 4th ed John
Wiley
References 3. Absolute Java, 5th Edition, W.Savitch, Addison Wesley,2012
4. Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest : Introduction to Algorithms
5. Robert Sedgwick, Algorithms in C/C++
6. Aho, Hopcroft, Ullman: The Design & Analysis of Computer Algorithms

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.45. Data Structures

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4160
Course Title Data Structures
Degree Program BSc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Data Storage
Module Code ECEGM4165
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5

165 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4160
Course Title Data Structures
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Laboratory/Practical Home Study
32 16 32 80
Course Objectives • To provide profound knowledge of the various data structures together with
their implementation and associated operations.
• To discuss various implementation of simple and popular data structures
• To explain and utilize linked lists, stacks, queues and trees.
• To make the student able to use existing data structures and to create a new
one.
Competences to be
Acquired
• The student will have a profound knowledge of data structures
• The students will be able to explain and utilize linked lists, stacks, queues and
trees.
Learning outcomes
• The student will be able to use the existing structures and create a new one
• The student will be able to choose best data structures to solve a problem at
hand
Skills (such as on
• The students extend their previous programming skills.
software) to acquire or
• The students master basic data structures
required
This course is intended to present the data structures which may be used in
computer storage to represent the information involved in solving problems (linked
Course Description
lists, heaps, hash tables, trees, graphs). Emphasis will be placed on concepts of data
abstraction and its implementation.
Contact
Week Course Contents
Hrs
2 10 1. Introduction
• Overview of Data Structures
• Data Abstraction
• Introduction to the Analysis of Algorithms: The Big Oh Notation
1 5 2. Arrays
• Memory Allocation
• Operations in Arrays
2 10 3. Linked Lists
• Types of linked lists: Singly/Simple Linked Lists: Circular, Doubly-
Linked
166 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4160
Course Title Data Structures
• Memory Allocation; Operations in Linked Lists;

2 10 4. Stacks and Queues

• Stacks: Definition, Implementation, and Application;
• Queues: Definition, Implementation, and Application
2 10 5. Trees
• Recursion
• Definition and Implementation; Type of Trees: Binary, Binary Search,
AVL, B+-Trees, Heaps; Tree Traversals
• Application of Trees
2 10 6. Hash Tables
• Hashing, Hash Functions, and Collisions
• Open Addressing
• Separate Chaining
2 10 7. Graphs
• Definition
• Implementation: Adjacency Matrix and Adjacency List Representation
• Searches: Depth-First and Breadth-First Searches
• Selected Graph Algorithms and Applications: Shortest Path, Minimum
Spanning Trees, Shortest path problem
1 5 8. Introduction to Sorting and Searching Algorithms

Pre-requisites ECEG3101: Object Oriented Programming

Co-requisites
Semester VIII
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning
Lectures, Lab, tutorial, class exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation&
Assignments 20%, Test 30%, Final 50 %
Grading System
• All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
Course policy
• Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated

167 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4160
Course Title Data Structures
• Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
• You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the time table indicated.
• 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I will
not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
• Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
• Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book
1. Data Structures and Algorithms, Mark.A.Weiss,3rd edition, Pearson Education,2012
2. Introduction to Algorithms, Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronal L,
Rivest and Clifford Stein, the MIT Press Cambridge, Massachusetts, 2001
3. Data Structures and Algorithms in Java,M.T. Goodrich and R. Tamassia, 4th
edition John Wiley
References
4. Data Structures in C and C++, by YedidyahLangsam, Moshe J. Augenstein,
Aaron M. Tanenbaum
5. Theory and Problems of Data Structures, Seymour Lipschutz, Schaums's
outline series
6. Data Structures & Algorithms in Java, Robert Lafore
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.46. Introduction to Compiler

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5171
Course Title Introduction to Compiler
Degree Program BSc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Programming Concepts & Software
Module Code ECEGM4175
Engineering

168 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Module Coordinator
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Laboratory/Practical Home Study
32 48 - 80
Course Objectives • To understand the basic principles of compiler design, its various constituent
parts, algorithms and data structures required to be used in the compiler.
• This course covers both the principles and practice for the design and
implementation of compilers and interpreters.
• After completing this course students should be able to explain the steps taken
when transforming a program written in a high-level language to a specific
machine language
Competences to be
Acquired
• To understand the basic principles of compiler design, its various constituent
parts, algorithms and data structures required to be used in the compiler.
• This course covers both the principles and practice for the design and
Learning outcomes implementation of compilers and interpreters.
• After completing this course students should be able to explain the steps taken
when transforming a program written in a high-level language to a specific
machine language
Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or •
required
This course studies the principles of programming languages with an emphasis on
programming language implementation and compiler design. This includes various
techniques for describing and defining a language, as well as techniques for
implementing compilers. The course is centered on a large programming project-the
Course Description
construction of a complete compiler for a small programming language. Topics to be
covered include: lexical analysis, syntactic analysis, recursive descent parsing, LR
parsing, syntax-directed translation, type checking, run-time environments, code
generation, code optimization, and various language design issues.
Contact
Week Course Contents
Hrs
1 5 1. Introduction and Overview of Compiling
• Programming Language Design Issues: Virtual Machines and Interpreted
Languages

169 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
• Major Data Structure in a compiler

2 10 2. Lexical Analysis and Scanning

• The scanning process
• Regular expression
• Finite Automata
• Implementation of TINY Scanner
2 10 3. Context Free Grammars and Parsing
• The parsing process
• Context free grammar
• Parse Tree and Abstract Syntax Tree
• Formal Properties of Context Free Languages
2 10 4. Top-Down Parsing
• Top-Down Parsing by Recursive-Descent
• LL(1) Parsing
• First and Follow Sets
• A Reclusive-Descent Parser for TINY Language
• Error Recovery in Top-Down Parsers
2 10 5. Bottom-up Parsing
• Overview of Bottom-up Parsing
• Finite Automata of LR(0) items and Parsing
• SLR(1) Parsing
• General LR(1) and LARL(1) Parsing
• LARL(1) Parse Generator
• Generation of TINY Parser
• Error Recovery in Bottom-up Parsing
3 10 6. Attribute Grammars and Semantic Analysis
• Attribute and Attribute Grammars
• Algorithm for Attribute Computation
• The Symbol Table
• Data Types and Type Checking
• A Sematic Analyzer for TINY Language
1 5 7. Runtime Organization
• Local Optimization
• Global Optimization
• Register Allocation

170 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
• Garbage Collection

ECEG3101: Object Oriented Programming

Pre-requisites
ECEG4160: Data Structures
Co-requisites
Semester IX
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning Lectures, tutorial, class exercises, the course will be given in a block basis in three
Methods weeks of semester nine
Assessment/Evaluation
Assignments 20%, Test 30%, Final 50 %
& Grading System
• All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
• Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not be
tolerated
• Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
Course policy • You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the time table indicated.
• 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I will
not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
• Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
• Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book
1. Engineering a Compiler by Keith Cooper, Linda Torczon
2. Compiler Construction: Principle and Paractice, K.C. Louden
3. Compilers: Principles, Techniques, and Tools, Aho, Lam, Sethi, and Ullman
4. Lex &Yacc, Levine, Mason and Brown, O'Reilly Publishers Michael Marcotty
and H. F.Ledgard
References
5. Concepts of Programming Languages, Robert W. Sebesta
6. Programming Languages: Concepts and Constructs, Ravi Sethi
7. Concepts in Programming Language, John C.Mitchel
8. Essentials of Programming Language, MIT Press
9. Programming Languages: Theory and Practice, Robert Harper

171 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.46. Computer and Network Security

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4182
Course Title Computer and Network Security
Degree Program BSc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Programming Concepts & Software
Module Code ECEGM4175
Module Coordinator Engineering
Lecturer
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Laboratory/Practical Home Study
32 32 16 80
Course Objectives • To discuss fundamentals of cryptography
• To explain the need for security
• To discuss the basic security mechanism, threats & protection mechanism
on a network
• T describe the main goals of goal of security
• To provide fundamentals of stream and block ciphers
• To exemplify conventional and public key cryptosystem
• To show the fundamentals of steganography
Competences to be
Acquired
• Learn fundamentals of cryptography
• Understand network security threats and countermeasures
• Acquire background for supporting electronic commerce
Learning outcomes
• Gain hands-on experience with programming techniques for security
protocols
• Obtain background for original research in network security

172 | P a g e

Course Code
Course Title
Skills (such as on software)
to acquire or required
Course Description
Week Contact Hrs
2 10
2 10
3 15
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
ECEG4182
Computer and Network Security
Security requirements and basic goals for computer security, Introduction to
cryptography and its application to network; applications of cryptography; secret
key and public key cryptographic algorithms; hash functions; authentication;
security for electronic mail; Digital Signature, Management of public Keys
Through Third Parties: some confidentiality and integrity Secure Socket Layer,
SSL Architecture, Hand shake Protocol, Change Cipher Spec Protocol, Alert
Protocol , IP-Security (IPSec.), Malicious code: viruses, worms, Trojan horses;
Problems in network security; kinds of attacks, PKI, key exchange protocols,
example protocols such as PGP ,Kerberos, IPSEC/VPN, SSL, S/MIME etc.
Steganography
Course Contents
1. Introduction
1.1. Security Goals
1.2. Security Attacks
1.3. Security Services
1.4. Security Mechanisms
1.5. A model for network Security
1.6. Viruses
1.7. Worms
1.8. Trojan horses
2. Symmetric ciphers
2.1. Classical Encryption Standards
• Caesar’s Cipher
• Vernam’s Cipher
• Other Stream Ciphers
2.2. Symmetric Cipher Model
2.3. Substitution Techniques
2.4. Transposition Techniques
2.5. Steganography
3. Block ciphers And Data Encryption standard
3.1. Block Cipher Principles
3.2. The Data Encryption Standard
3.3. Implantation of DES
173 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4182
Course Title Computer and Network Security
3.4. The strength of DES
3.5. Double and Triple DES
2 10 4. Advanced Encryption Standard
4.1. The AES ciphers
4.2. Simplified AES
2 10 5. Public Key Encryption
5.1. Encryption function
5.2. Principles of Public key cryptography
5.3. The RSA algorithm
5.4. Implementation of RSA
2 10 6. Key Management
6.1. Introduction
• Distribution of Public Keys
• Distribution of Private keys using Public Key Cryptosystem
6.2. Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange Algorithm
6.3. Elliptic curve Cryptography
6.4. Message authentication and hash functions
• Authentication functions
• \Hash functions
1 5 7. Digital signatures and authentication protocols
7.1. Digital signature standard
7.2. Digital signatures
7.3. Kerberoes
7.4. X.509 authentication service
7.5. PGP
7.6. S/MIME
7.7. IP security
Pre-requisites ECEG3101: Object Oriented Programming
Co-requisites
Semester VIII
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning
Lectures, Lab, tutorial, class exercises
Methods

174 | P a g e
 Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4182
Course Title Computer and Network Security
Assessment/Evaluation&
Assignments 20%, Test 30%, Final 50 %
Grading System
• All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
• Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will
not be tolerated
• Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
Course policy • You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
• 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
• Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
• Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.

Text book

1. Cryptography and Network security by William stallings.

2. A S Tannenbaum " Computer Networks" Prentice Hall of India Publication
, 2002
References 3. Fourozon " Data Communication & Computer Networks" Tata Mcgraw
Hill Publication.
4. C. E. Perkins, B. Woolf, and S. R. Alpert. "Mobile IP: Design Principles
and Practices," Addison Wesley, 2000.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.47. Software Engineering

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG-4170

175 | P a g e
Course Title Software Engineering
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code ECEGM4175
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
(32 Hours) (48 Hours) - (48 Hours)

Course Objectives ▪ After successfully completed this course, the student should be able to:
➢ Acquainted with the classical and object oriented software
engineering paradigms
➢ Work in large software projects and to work in teams
➢ Apply Object Oriented Software development techniques
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes

Skills (such as on Student will understand the concepts, know-how, and visual paradigm tools for
software) to acquire or UML Modeling
required
Course Description This course provides an introduction to the problems of software development and
maintenance and the process and methods to address them. although all phases in
the software development life cycle will be introduced,the main focus will be on
object oriented analysis and design
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
Chapter 1: Software Engineering Overview
✓ FAQs about software engineering
✓ Professional and ethical responsibility
Chapter 2:Software Project Management
✓ Management activities
✓ Project planning
✓ Project scheduling
✓ Risk management
Chapter 3:Product and Processes
✓ The Product
- The Evolving Role of Software,software characteristic
and its application

176 | P a g e
 ✓ The Process
- Software process models, process iteration, and process
activities
- Computer-aided software engineering
Chapter 4: Software Requirement Analysis
➢ Functional and non-functional requirement
➢ User and system requirement
➢ Interface specification and the software requirements document
➢ Requirement Engineering Processes
Chapter 5: Conventional Methods for Software Engineering
➢ System Engineering
➢ Analysis Concepts and Principles
➢ Architectural Design,User Interface Design and Component –
Level Design
➢ Software Testing Techniques
Chapter 6:Object-Oriented Software Engineering
➢ Object-oriented concept and principles
➢ Object-oriented analysis
➢ Object-oriented design
➢ Object oriented testing
Chapter 7: Validation and Verification
✓ Planning verification and validation
✓ Software inspections
✓ Automated static analysis
✓ Verification and formal analysis
Pre-requisites ECEG-3081 Object oriented programming

Co-requisites -

Target group/Semester 4/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Problem solving session

Methods ▪ Case studies using UML modeling software
▪ Home work
Assessment/Evaluation& ➢ Assignment 10%
Grading System ➢ Quiz 10%
➢ Project 30%
➢ Final Examination 50%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.

177 | P a g e
 ▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in
your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book [1] Software Engineering, A Practionioner’s approach-5th Ed,Roger
S.Pressman,Mc-Graw Hill 2001
[2] Software Engineering: Principles and Practice,3rd ed.Hans van
Vliet,Wiley,2007
References [1] Fundamental of Software Engineering-Carlo Ghezzi;Mehdi Jazayeri;Dino
Mandrioli
[2] classical and object oriented software engineering with UML
[3] Java How to Program,6th edition,H.M.Deitel-P.J.Deitel,Pearson
Education,2005
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.48. Database Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG-5162
Course Title Database Systems
Degree Program B.Sc. In Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Data Storage
Module Code ECEGM4163
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5

178 | P a g e
Student work load
Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
Pre-requisites
Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
(32 Hours) (16 Hours) (32 Hours) (64 Hours)
▪ Introduce the concept of database systems and modeling techniques
▪ Provide a profound ground for the analysis, design and implementation
of data base systems
▪ Discuss advanced database types and issues related to storage and
security
-
-
This course is designed to provide student a working knowledge of
fundamental concepts of a data base systems, functionality of data base system,
types of model, steps of data base design, structured query language(SQL),and
introduction them to distributed and parallel databases
Course Contents
Chapter 1:Introduction,historical perspective, component and
function of database system, types of models, steps of database
design
Chapter 2:conceptual level design, E/R model: Entities and
relationships, attribute types, key types, types of constraints,
multiplicity and participation, symbols, design guidelines, ODL
model: Syntax, OO concepts, ODL diagram, comparisons with E/R
Chapter 3:Relational database design, relation ,dependencies,
normal forms, normalization steps, overall design process
Chapter 4: Relation Algebra, simple operations and symbols,
complex operations, introduction to relational calculus
Chapter 5:Structured Query Language(SQL) introduction, construct
and their syntax, sub queries, views, embedded and dynamic SQL
Chapter 6: Data Storage and query evaluation, file structure,
indexing and hashing, query evaluation
Chapter 7: security and integration, assertion, triggers, security and
authorization, encryption and authentication, introduction to
distributed and parallel databases
ECEG-3081 Object oriented programming
179 | P a g e
 Co-requisites -

Target group/Semester 4/I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods ▪ Problem solving session

▪ Lab exercises using my sql server, oracle for database
implementation
▪ Home works
Assessment/Evaluation& - Continuous assessment=50%
Grading System - Final exam=50%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
Senate Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism
will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for
class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value
in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Text book [1] Elmasri, Navathe: Fundamental of Database Systems
[2] Silbershatz , Korth,Sudarshan: Database system concepts
References [1] Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke: Database Management systems
[2] H.C.Mollina,J.D. Ullman, J.Widom: Database system, the complete book
[3] Pervasive Software Inc. Database design guide
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.49. Introduction to Instrumentation

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4119
Course Title Introduction to Instrumentation

180 | P a g e
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Electrical Systems Engineering
Module Code ECEGM4123
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credit 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home Study
Laboratory
32 16 32 80
Course Objectives & • To discuss the major elements of a measurement system
Competences to be • To discuss the principle of operation and behavior of typical sensing
Acquired devices used in instrumentation applications
Course Description • General Principles of Instrumentation, Sensors and Applications, Signal
Conditioning Circuits, Signal Conversion Elements, Output
Presentation
Week C. hour Course Contents
• General Principles
o Basic Concepts of Measurement; Performance Characteristics
– Static and Dynamic; Noise and Interference in
Instrumentations
• Sensors and Applications
o Position and Motion (velocity, acceleration, vibration, shock)
Sensing,
o Force and Torque (strain, stress)
o Light
o Temperature and Heat
o Pressure
o Humidity, density, specific weight, and specific
gravity, Viscosity;
o Sound;
o PH, Chemical, smoke
o Level and flow
o Discrete Output Sensors: Shaft Encoders
o Biomedical applications
o Fiber optics and laser instrumentation
• Signal Conditioning and Conversion
o Deflection Bridges, Amplifiers and Attenuators,
Oscillators and Filters

181 | P a g e
 o Digital to Analogue Converter and Analogue to
Digital Converter
• Output Presentation
o Indicators: Pointer-Scale, Alphanumeric, Graphical;
o Recorders: Graphical, Magnetic, Semiconductor
Pre-requisites
Co-requisite ECEG4115: Introduction to Control Systems
Target group/Semester 4/I
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning Lectures supported by tutorials and practical laboratory exercises.
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation & Assignments and Laboratory exercise (20 %), Mid-exam (30 %), Final-
Grading System exam (50%)
Attendance Requirements 80% lecture, 100% laboratory
Literature Textbook:
• J.P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems
References:
• A.K. Gosh, Electronic Instrumentation
• Doeblin, Principles of Instrumentation
• B.E. Jones, Instrumentation Measurement and Feedback
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.50. Instrumentation Engineering

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5192
Course Title Instrumentation Engineering
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code ECEGM4206
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credit 5

182 | P a g e
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home Study
Laboratory
32 16 32 80
Course Objectives & • To discuss electronic circuit design techniques for electronic
Competences to be instrumentation
Acquired • To introduce intelligent instrumentation beginning from
modern sensors and microprocessor-based systems
Course Description • Electronic Instrumentation, Sensor Technology; Telemetry
Applications, Introduction to Intelligent and Virtual Instruments
Week C. hour Course Contents
1. Electronic Instrumentation: Revision of Electromechanical Indicating
Instruments, Basic electronic instruments, specialized electronic instruments
2. Intelligent Instrumentation: Smart vs. intelligent instruments, sensor material
and technology, embedded computers in instruments, instrument
interfaces/communication buses, instrument systems, computer networks for
instrumentation
3. Introduction to virtual instrumentation: History of instrumentation systems,
virtual vs. traditional instruments, architecture of virtual instruments,
introduction to LabVIEW
4. Telemetry applications in Instrumentation: Base-band telemetry (amplitude,
frequency), multiple channel telemetry (FDM, TDM)
Pre-requisites ECEG4119: Introduction to Instrumentation
ECEG4154: Microcomputers and Interfacing
Co-requisite --------
Target group/Semester 5/II
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning Lectures supported by tutorials and practical laboratory exercises.
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation & Assignments and Laboratory exercise (20 %), Mid-exam (30%), Final-exam
Grading System (50%)
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature
Attendance Requirements 80% lecture, 100% laboratory
Literature Textbook:
• P.H. Garrett, Advanced Instrumentation and Computer I/O
Design

183 | P a g e
 References:
• IEEE – Transactions of Instrumentation and Control
• IEE – Transactions Control and Instrumentation
• J.P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems

8.3.51. Introduction to Control Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4115
Course Title Introduction to Control Systems
Degree Program Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Electrical Systems Engineering

Module Code ECEGM4113

Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80

Course Objectives ▪ At the end of the Course students will add to their knowledge-base in the
fundamentals of electrical engineering modelling and design, develop basic
skills of utilizing mathematical tools needed to analyse and design classical
linear dynamic control systems.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning Outcomes ▪

Skills (such as on Students will use and understand the application of software tools in Control system
software) to acquire or analysis and design (eg. MATLAB and Simulink, Mathematical )
required
Course Description Classification of the control system, Block diagram algebra, Transfer function and
graphical representation of linear systems, time domain, and frequency domain
analysis, and controller and compensator design.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
Introductory Control Concepts: Introduction, Fundamentals of Control system,
1&2 10 Classification of the control system, Laplace Transform, Transfer function, Block
diagram algebra, Signal flow graph

184 | P a g e
 Mathematical Modelling of Physical System: Introduction, Modelling Electrical
3&4 10 Systems, Modelling Mechanical system, Modelling of Electro-mechanical systems,
Modelling of thermal and fluid systems, Modelling Analogous System, Basic Control
System components

5 5 Feedback Control System Characteristics: Sensitivity of Control System for

parameter variation, Disturbance signals in a feedback control system , The cost of
feedback

Control System Analysis in Time Domain: Introduction to system response,

6&7 10 Standard Test Signals, Poles, Zeros and System Response, Type and Order of the
System, First-order System response, Second-order System response, Steady-State
Performance of Linear Control System, Effect of Adding Poles and Zeros to Transfer
Functions
Stability Analysis of LTI Systems: Introduction, Asymptotic stability, Impulse
8&9 10 response stability, Bounded input bounded output (BIBO) stability, Coefficient Test
for Stability, Routh’s Stability Test, and Relative Stability Analysis, String efficiency
and method of improvement

Root Locus analysis: Introduction, Root Locus for Feedback Systems, Root Locus
10&11 10 Construction, Stability margin, Compensator design (Phase-lead, phase-lag, lead-
lag compensation)
Frequency Response Analysis: Introduction, Frequency Response, Correlation
12&13 10 between Time Response and Frequency Response, Graphical Representation of
Frequency Response, The Nyquist Stability Criterion, Bode Plot, Closed-loop
frequency response (Control specification in frequency domain, closed-loop response
from open-loop frequency response, Nichols chart)
14,15&16 15 Control Systems design: Introduction, Basic Control Modes, Design Specification
of the Control system, Approaches to system design, Cascade compensation network,
Frequency response method: Phase-lead compensation, phase-lag compensation,
lead-lag compensation, PID controller and Classical Tuning Procedure: the Ziegler-
Nicholas procedure

Pre-requisites Signal and Systems Analysis

Co-requisites Introduction to Instrumentation

Semester I

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lecture/Problem-solving sessions.

Methods ▪ Case studies using MATLAB.
▪ Soft laboratories
▪ Home works.

185 | P a g e
 Assessment/Evaluation& ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20
Grading System ▪ One midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not
be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook 1. Nise, Norman S. Control Systems Engineering, 6th ed. Wiley Global
Education, 2011.
2. Ogata, Katsuhiko. Modern control engineering. 5th ed. Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2010.
References 1. Dorf, Richard C., and Robert H. Bishop. "Modern Control Systems.—12th
edition. Edition." (2011).
2. Kuo, Benjamin C., and M. Farid Golnaraghi. Automatic control systems.
Vol. 9. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1995.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.52. Modern Control Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4190
Course Title Modern Control Systems
Degree Program Control Engineering
Module Name Control Systems and Instrumentation Engineering
Module Code ECEGM4196
Module Coordinator NN

186 | P a g e
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 32 16 80
Course Objectives ▪ To teach students modelling in state space and state-space representation of
dynamic systems
▪ To teach students the techniques of converting transfer function to state-space
model and vice versa using decomposition method.
▪ To teach students to solve the time-invariant state equation.
▪ To teach students analysis techniques in the state-space model: stability,
controllability, and observability.
▪ To teach students design techniques in the state-space model: Pole
placements, state observer, design servo system, quadratic optimal regulator
systems.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
▪ Review of basic Linear Algebra Operations including rank, determinant,
cofactors, gauss elimination, and matrix inverse, Determination of the
eigenvalues and eigenvectors of matrices.
▪ Understand the State Space representation of linear dynamical Models.
Clarify the difference between classical control theory and modern control
theory.
▪ Understand the basic concepts of decomposition of transfer functions. Find
the state space representation of transfer functions using canonical forms.
▪ Understand the theory of similarity transformation. Apply similarity
transformation between canonical forms for systems.
▪ Derivation of the transition matrix. Study the stability of control systems in
state-space representation. Solve the state equations of dynamical systems.
▪ Determine the controllability and observability of control system state-space
representation
▪ Understand the design concept of control systems in state-space
representation.
▪ Apply pole placement design technique for control systems.
▪ Design of state feedback control law.
▪ Design of full state observer.

Skills (such as on Students will use and understand the application of software tools in Control system
software) to acquire or analysis and design in state space (eg. MATLAB and Simulink, Mathematical )
required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

187 | P a g e
1&2 10 Fundamentals of Matrix Algebra: Rank of the matrix, determinant of a matrix,
cofactors, gauss elimination, and matrix inverse, Eigenvalues, and eigenvectors.
3&4 10 State Space Representation of Dynamical System: Definition of state-space
model, advantages of state-space model over the classical model, Non-uniqueness of
state variable model,

5&6 10 Decomposition of Transfer function: Convert the transfer function to Direct

Canonical and Observable form, Cascade form, and Parallel Form.

7&8 10 Similarity Transformation for State Space: Definition of similarity

transformation, similarity transformation to diagonal and Jordan form, similarity
transformation to canonical form.

9&10 10 Response and Stability Issues of State Space Model: Solve the state equation, the
definition of the state transition matrix, stability of control system in state space

11&12 10 Controllability and Observability of State Space: Definition of Controllability

and Observability, the method to check and determine the observability and
controllability

13&14 10 Pole Placement Technique: Advantages of pole placement, design feedback

controller, design state observer, design observed- stated feedback controller, design
regulator system.

15&16 10 Controller Design: Design servo system, introduction to optimal quadratic

controller

Pre-requisites Introduction to Control Systems (ECEG4115)

Co-requisites
Semester II
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning ▪ Lecture /Problem-solving sessions.
Methods ▪ Case studies using MATLAB.
▪ Soft laboratories
▪ Home works.

Assessment/Evaluation ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20

& Grading System ▪ One midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not be
tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the time table indicated.

188 | P a g e
 ▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook 1. Modern Control Engineering, Katsuhiko Ogata, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall
2. Modern Control Systems. Richard Dorf and Robert Bishop, 12th Edition,
Prentice-Hall.

References 1. Control Systems Engineering, by Norman S. Nise, 6th Edition, Johm Wiley
2. Automatic Control Systems by Benjamin C. Kuo, Farid Golinaraghi. 9th
Edition. Wiley

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.53. Digital Control Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Number ECEG5194

Course Title Digital Control Systems

Degree Program Control Engineering

Module Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Module Coordinator N.N.

Lecturer N.N.

ECTS Credits 5

Contact Hours (per 5

week)

Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home

Laboratory study
32 48 - 80

Course Objectives ▪ To understand, model and analyse digital control systems

▪ Understand computer implementation using digital control systems,

components as DAC, ADC, microcontrollers, sensors, etc.

189 | P a g e
 ▪ To design digital control systems and implement for common servo
applications.

▪ Design of digital control using transform techniques and state space methods

▪ Digital control system applications and practices.

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes ▪ Identify different neural network architectures, their limitations and
appropriate learning rules for each of the architectures.
▪ Select appropriate neural network architectures for a given application (i.e.
they shall recognize the class of applications and relate it to specific
architectures).
▪ Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of fuzzy systems as they apply in
engineering and science.
▪ Assess the power and usefulness of artificial neural networks in several
applications including speech synthesis, diagnostic problems, business and
finance, robotic control, signal processing, computer vision and many other
problems that fall under the category of pattern recognition.
Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description A basic introduction to neural networks & fuzzy logic, development, and
implementation. It includes; Neural versus conventional computing. Learning
processes. The MLP NN, backpropagation learning algorithm. Recurrent networks.
Self-organization Feature maps. Applications. Introduction to Fuzzy theory. Fuzzy
Logic. Neuro-Fuzzy system in engineering.
Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents
1&2 10 Introduction to Digital Control Systems: Introduction, advantages and
disadvantages, Digital control systems components, Examples, Sampling process:-
Impulse sampling and data hold, quantization and quantization error, Sampled data
control system:-DAC/ADC and hold circuit, Review of Z-transform, Mapping s-plane
to z-plane. Transfer function of discrete data systems -Transfer function of ZOH and
FOH, The Pulse Transfer Function and Block Diagram Analysis, Overview of digital
control design techniques.

3&4 10 Discrete Equivalents : Design of Discrete Equivalents via Numerical Integration:-

Forward rectangular rule (Euler's rule), Backward rectangular rule, Trapezoidal,
Prewarped trapezoidal, Zero-Pole Matching Equivalents, Hold equivalents:-Zero-
Order Hold Equivalent and First-Order Hold Equivalent, MATLAB Function to Find
Discrete Equivalents.

190 | P a g e
5,6&7 15 Linear discrete system analysis: Linear Difference Equations, Review of state space
techniques to continuous data systems, The Discrete Transfer Function, State-Space
Models for Discrete Systems, State space representation of discrete systems,
Controllability, Observability and Stability of Discrete Time Systems.

8&9 10 Design Using Transform Techniques: Control system design specifications ,Time
domain design specifications:-Time domain analysis Response specifications and
Steady-State Error Analysis, Design by Emulation (Discrete Equivalent Controllers),
Direct Design by Root Locus in the z-Plane: Z-Plane Design Specification, Error
Coefficients, The Discrete Root Locus, Transforming constant loci from s-plane to z-
plane, The effects of gain and sampling period, Design digital controller using
Discrete Root locus: - Root locus of the system with digital PD, PI and PID controller
and Digital root locus-Lead and Lag compensation. Stability test of Discrete systems:-
Jury and Schur-cohn stability test, Frequency Response Methods: Why w-plane
instead of z-plane, Transformation from s-plane to W-plane, Design Specifications in
the Frequency Domain, w-plane frequency domain design using bode plot. Lead and
Lag Compensation Design Procedure, Direct Design Method of Ragazzini

10&11 10 Design Using State-Space Methods: Control Law Design: Pole Placement,
Controllability, Estimator Design: Why Estimators, Prediction Estimators,
Observability, Prediction Estimator Pole Placement, Current Estimators, Current
Estimator Pole Placement, Reduced-Order Estimators. Combined Control Law and
Estimator: The Separation Principle, Guidelines for Pole Placement, Introduction of
the Reference Input: Reference Inputs for Full-State Feedback (The State-Command
Structure), Reference Inputs with Estimators (The State-Command Structure), Output
Error Command, Integral Control by State Augmentation

15 Digital Control System Implementation: Hardware used in the implementation of

digital controller, Finite-word-length representation of digital controller coefficients
12,13&14 and root sensitivity, Controller transfer function realizations (algorithms): Direct
canonical form, Parallel, Cascade, Ladder, Programming input and output (I/O) and
ensuring sampling time, Computer architecture for control, Software for control

Pre-requisites ECEG4190: Modern Control Systems

Co-requisites -
Semester II
Status of Course Compulsory
Teaching & Learning
Lectures supported by Tutorials and exercises
Methods
Assessment/Evaluation ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20
& Grading System ▪ One midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

191 | P a g e
 Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not be
tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook 2. Jene F. Franklin and others, “Digital Control of Dynamic systems” Addison-
Wesley publishing company, second Edition.

References 1. Charles L. Phillips & H. Troy Nagle, Digital Control System Analysis and Design
2. Katsuhiko Ogata ,Discret-Time Control Systems, Second edition, Printice-Hall
of India, 2006
3. Benjamin C. Kuo , Digital Control Systems, Second edition , Oxford University
Press , 2004
4. M.Gopal , Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Second edition ,Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing

,2004

4. Charles L.Phillips,H. Troy Nagle, Digital Control Systems Analysis and Design,
3rd Ed

Constantine H. Houpis, Gary B. Lamont, Digital Control Systems Theory, Hardware,

Software, International Edition.
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.54. Industrial Process Control and Automation

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5204

192 | P a g e
Course Title Industrial Process Control and Automation
Degree Program Control Engineering
Module Name Control Applications

Module Code ECEGM2073

Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student workload Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80

Course Objectives At the end of this course students will be able to: -

▪ Understand the basic concept of process control fundamentals

▪ Understand the advanced control techniques.
▪ Understand the concept of advanced industrial process control
▪ To design and simulate typical industrial process control systems
▪ Develop the automation industrial process

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes ▪

Skills (such as on
software) to acquire or
required
Course Description Process Modelling, Transfer function, State-space models, Time series models,
Feedback & Feedforward Control, PID design and tuning, Cascade control, Selective
control loops-Ratio control, Control, State feedback control, LQR problem, Pole
placement, Process Interactions-Singular value analysis, tuning of multi-loop PID
control systems-decoupling control, Real-time optimization, Model predictive control,
Batch Process control, Plant-wide control & monitoring, Introduction to Fuzzy Logic
in Process Control, Introduction to OPC, Comparison of performance different types
of control with examples on the software package, Programmable Logic Controllers,
The human-machine interface (HMI), Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
System

Week Cr. Hrs Course Contents

Process Modelling: Introduction to Process control and process instrumentation,
1&2 10 Hierarchies in process control systems, Theoretical models, Transfer function, State-
space models, Time series models, Development of empirical models from process

193 | P a g e
 data, chemical reactor modelling, Analysis using MATLAB/SIMULINK or
LABVIEW
Feedback & Feedforward Control: Feedback controllers, PID design, tuning
methods, troubleshooting, Cascade control, Selective control loops, Ratio control,
3,4&5 15 Control system design based on Frequency response Analysis, Feedforward and ratio
control, State feedback control, LQR problem, Pole placement, Simulation using
software, Control system instrumentation, Control valves, Codes and standards,
Preparation of P& I Diagrams

Advanced process control: Multi-loop and multivariable control, Process

Interactions, Singular value analysis, tuning of multi-loop PID control systems,
6&7 10 decoupling control, strategies for reducing control loop interactions, Real-time
optimization, Simulation using software

Model predictive control: Batch Process control, Plant-wide control & monitoring,
Plant wide control design, Instrumentation for process monitoring, Statistical process
8,9&10 15 control, Introduction to Fuzzy Logic in Process Control, Introduction to OPC,
Introduction to environmental issues, and sustainable development relating to process
industries, Comparison of performance of different types of control with examples on
software.

Programmable Logic Controllers: Introduction to PLC, basic parts of PLC, Input

11,12&13 15 and output Device of PLC Some Commercial PLC brands, The IEC 1131-3
Programming concept; Overview of the Siemens S5 and S7 series of PLCs; The S7
300/400 PLCs, Programming PLCs with LAD, FBD and STL, Networking PLCs with
Profibus (and TCP/IP);

Computer Control of Processes: Basics of Computer Controls, Distributed control

14,15&16 15 system (DCS), Communication Protocol, Human Machine Interface (HMI),
Introduction to the SCADA system, Typical architectures of SCADA, Functions of
SCADA, SCADA hardware and software requirements

Pre-requisites
ECEG4190: Modern Control Systems
Co-requisites ECEG5192: Instrumentation Engineering

Semester II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning ▪ Lecture/Problem-solving sessions.

Methods ▪ Case studies using MATLAB/SIMULINK, LABVIEW
▪ Soft laboratories
▪ Home works.

194 | P a g e
 Assessment/Evaluation ▪ Quiz, Graded homework assignment………….20
& Grading System ▪ One midterm exam ……………………………30
▪ Final exam……………………………………..50

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students Senate
Legislation of our University throughout this course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism will not be
tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to discussions.
Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments provided according to
the timetable indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. I
will not allow you to enter if you are late more than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value in your
grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the class.
Textbook 1. Seborg, D.E., T.F. Edgar, and D.A. Mellichamp, Process Dynamics and
Control, John Wiley, 2004
2. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control: An Introduction to Theory and
Practice”, Prentice-Hall, New Delhi, 1999.
3. Harriott P., “Process Control”, MH, 1991.

References 1. Johnson D Curtis, Instrumentation Technology, (7th Edition) Prentice Hall

India, 2002.
2. Bob Connel, Process Instrumentation Applications Manual, McGraw-Hill,
1996.
3. Edgar, T.F. & D.M. Himmelblau, Optimization of Chemical Processes,
McGraw-Hill Book Co, 1988.
4. B. Wayne Bequette, Process control: modeling, design, and simulation
Prentice Hall PTR, 2003

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.55. Introduction to Robotics

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5202

195 | P a g e
Course Title Introduction to Robotics
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Control applications
Module Code ECEG-M4331
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 4
Student work load (per week) Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 32 48 48

Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
At the end of this course the student will be able to: -
• Understand the fundamentals of robotics
• Formulate the kinematics and dynamics of robotics
• Analysis the kinematics and dynamics of robotics
• Develop the appropriate mechanism of robotics
• Formulate the nearest trajectory planning
• Design the controller of robotics
This course is designed to provide students with a working knowledge of:
Robot Fundamentals; Mechanisms and Actuators, Sensors and Actuaters;
Modeling and Control of Manipulators; Robot Applications and
Programming
Understand the elements of a robotic system, mechanisms, sensors,
actuators and end effectors.
▪ Program robotic manipulators.
▪ Be able to model and build simple robots.
Basic knowledge of Matlab.
Introduction: - What is Robotics?, Evolution of robots and robotics,
Components of Robotics, Classification of Robotics, Actuators , sensors
of Robotics and Application of Robotics ;Robot kinematics: - rigid body
motion, transformation of coordinates, Position, Velocity, Acceleration,
Force torque; Modeling of dynamics: - Newtons equations, Euler
Lagrange method;
Trajectory generation: - Joint space planning, Cartesian space planning;
Robot
control; -Linear control, Force control, Computed torque control
Course Contents
1. Introduction
1.2 Evolution of robots and robotics

196 | P a g e
 1.3 Robot anatomy
1.4.Components of Robotics
1.5.Classification of Robotics
1.6.Actuators and sensors of Robotics
1.7.Application of Robotics

2. Kinematics
2.1.Position and Orientation of Objects
2.2.Coordinate Transformation
2.3.Joint Variables and Position of End Effector
2.4 Denavit-Hartenberg notation
2.5. Manipulator Jacobian Matrix
2.6.Inverse Kinematics Problem and solvability of inverse kinematic
model

3. Dynamic Modeling of Manipulator

3.1. Lagrang-Euler Formulations
3.4. Newton-Euler Formulation
3.6. Identification of Manipulator Dynamics

4. Trajectory planning and generation

4.1. Joint space planning
4.2. Cartesian space planning

5. Robot control
6.1.Linear control of manipulators.
6.2.Force control of manipulators.
6.3 Computed torque control

Pre-requisites ECEG4115 Introduction to Control Systems

ECEG4190 Modern Control Systems
Co-requisites None

Year/Semester V/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods Lectures, tutorials, and Laboratory exercises

Assessment/Evaluation& Grading Continuous Assessment=50%, Final Exam=50%

System
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of
students Senate Legislation of our University throughout this
course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and
plagiarism will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments
provided according to the time table indicated.

197 | P a g e
 ▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on
time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more
than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own
value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the
class.
Text book 1. Tsuneo Yoshikawa,” Foundations of robotics: analysis and
control”,1988
References 1. John J. Craig,” Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”,
Third Edition
2. Saeed Benjamin Niku,” introduction to robotics
analysis,control,applications”, Second Edition
3. S K Saha,” Introduction to Robotics”, Second Edition, New Delhi
4 Ashitava Chosal,” robotics fundamentals concepts and analysis”,
oxford university ,2006
5. Robert J.schilling,” fundamentals of robotics analysis and
control”,New Delhi,2003. Ramachandran Nagarajan,” introduction to
industrial robotics”, India, 2016

Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.56. Introduction to Power System Automation

Aksum University

Aksum Institute of Technology

Faculty of Electrical and Computer Engineering

Program Regular
Course Title Introduction to Power System Automation
Course Code ECEG5232
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical Engineering
Module Name
Module Number 25
Module Team Leader N.N
Course Instructor

198 | P a g e
ECTS 5
Contact hour per week 5
Contact Days ( time and Per day/ 2hr/
room)

Target Group V Year

Year/Semester V/II
Prerequisites ECEG4221: Power Systems
Status of the course Compulsory
Course Description This course introduces computer applications in powers systems and covers the
modelling and simulations of Load flow Analysis, Fault Studies, Power system
stability, Analysis of Harmonic Propagation, Optimization and security in power
systems
Course Objectives After completion of the course students will be able to:

- Understand Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system

- Understand on-line and real-time applications of computers system voltage
and excitation control, automatic generation control (AGC) and economic
dispatch control
- Gain insight into computer aided protection and application of DSP to
protection of power systems
Detailed Course Schedule: Contact time, topics and reading materials

Topic/Subtopic/Chapter Remarks

1. Introduction: Computers in Power Systems; Computer Tasks; Automatic Generation

Control; Generation Scheduling; Security Assessment; Optimal Power Flow; Transmission
System Development; Interactive Power System Analysis

2. Load flow Analysis: Network Modeling; Basic Nodal Method; Power system matrix; Fast
decouple power flow

3. Fault Studies: Analysis of Three-phase Faults; Admittance Matrix Equation; Impedance

Matrix Equation; Fault Calculations; Analysis of Unbalanced Faults; Admittance Matrices;
Short-circuit Faults; Open-circuit Faults; Program Description and Typical Solutions
4. Power system stability modeling: Introduction; Basic model of Synchronous machine;
Synchronous machine Automatic controller Loads; Transmission network; Induction machine;
AC-DC conversion; Relays; Unbalanced Faults
5. Analysis of Harmonic Propagation: Transmission line models; Transformer model;
Application of the harmonic penetration algorithm

6. Optimization and security: Formulation of the optimization problem; Conditions for

minimization; Sensitivity of the objective function; Security assessment
Final Exam Date

199 | P a g e
 Teaching Methodology Lectures supported by tutorials, Projects and Laboratory exercises.

Assessment Methods • Continuous assessment…………………………... 50%

• Final Exam………………..........................................50%
All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of students
throughout this course.

• Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and plagiarism

will not be tolerated.
• Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
Course Policies • Students are required to submit and present the assignments provided
according to the time table indicated.
• 80% of lecture class attendance and 100% lab session attendance
is mandatory! Please try to be on time for class. Students will not be
allowed to enter class if late more than five minutes.
• Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own value
in your grade
• Cell phones MUST be turned off before entering the class.
1.J. Arrillaga and C. P. Arnold: Computer Analysis Of Power Systems

References 2. Guide to Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) and

Industrial Control Systems Security, Keith Stoufer, Joe Falco and Karen Kent.

2.Software Manual

Approved By:
________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.57. Energy Conversion and Rural Electrification

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5220
Course Title Energy Conversion and Rural Electrification
Degree Program B.Sc
Module Name Energy Conversion and distribution
Module Code ECEGM4227
Module Coordinator
Lecturer

200 | P a g e
ECTS Credits
Student work load
Course Objectives
Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
5
Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80
• To introduce technologies of conventional and nonconventional
power plants.
• To learn the operation and types of Thermal and nuclear power
plants.
• To provide knowledge of planning, design and development of
hydroelectric power plants.
• To give an insight into planning and design of small scale and
Off-grid & On-grid Solar electrical power generation.
• To know the parts, operation and applications of Wind, Biomass
and Geothermal power plant.
• To introduce techniques and methods of planning and designing
rural electrification and microgrids.
Teamwork, planning, responsibility, interpersonal understanding, critical
thinking, and basics of thermodynamics, electrical machines and
renewable and non-renewable energy sources.
At the end of this course students can easily gain knowledge about
• The different types and parts of renewable and non-renewable
energy sources.
• The applications, advantages and dis-advantages of renewable
and non-renewable energy sources.
• The value and need of renewable energy sources.
• The design methodology of renewable energy sources.
• The importance of rural electrification
• The basic design of Microgrid using renewable energy sources.
The operation of renewable and non-renewable energy sources.
This course describes the overview of thermodynamics, and provides
detail operations and types of Thermal and nuclear power plants,
Hydropower plants, Solar plants, Wind power plant, Biomass power
plant, Geothermal power plant, Rural electrification.
Course Contents
1. Introduction
201 | P a g e
 Conventional and non-conventional resource - Overview of
Thermodynamics - First and second laws of thermodynamics and Carnot
cycle.
2. Thermal and Nuclear Power Plants
Fuels and combustion - Gas turbines - Combined cycles and Operating
practices - Nuclear Fuel – Fission and Fusion - Radioactive decay.
3. Hydropower
Basic concepts - Classification, Embankment dams, Gravity dams Arch
dams, Buttress dam - Site selection - Types of spillways, Gravity
spillways, Siphon spillways Conduits, Intake, Power house and
Accessories - Intake structures - Location of power house - Classification
of power house - Types of turbines – Small scale hydropower design -
Flow rate measurement.
4. Solar Energy
Introduction - Solar cell technologies and PV systems – Characteristic
equation – Parameters of solar cell – MPPT – Bypass and Blocking
diodes – Standalone and grid connected design methodology for SPV
system.
5. Wind Energy
Basic theory of wind energy and fundamental equation – Parts – Control
systems - Types of turbines and rotors - Wind resource Analysis and
Applications.
6. Biomass energy
Introduction Biomass energy – Advantages, Limitations, challenges –
Potential barriers - Biomass power generation and Direct combustion
applications – Costs.
7. Geothermal energy
Introduction – Advantages – Commercial viability – Geothermal power
project – Types of geothermal plants – Uses – Environmental impact.
8. Rural Electrification
Potential assessment, Comparative analysis (Grid versus standalone),
Introduction to Micro-grid and Smart grid
Pre-requisites ECEG 4220: Electrical Machines
ECEG 4260: Power Electronics and Electrical Drives
ECEG 4210: Power Systems
Co-requisites ECEG 5212: Power System Operation and Control

Semester Year : 5, Semester : 2

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods Lecture supported by tutorial and assignments

202 | P a g e
Assessment/Evaluation& Grading Minimum 85% for lectures and tutorials
System Minimum 15% for Assignments
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of
students Senate Legislation of our University throughout this
course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and
plagiarism will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments
provided according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on
time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more
than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own
value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the
class.
Text book 1. Muhammad Kamran and Muhammad Rayyan Fazal,
“Renewable Energy Conversion Systems”, Elsevier
Publications, 2021.
2. Dipak K. Sarkar, “Thermal Power Plant Design and Operation”,
Elsevier Publications, 2015.
3. Hermann-Josef Wagner, “Introduction to Hydro Energy
Systems”, Springer Verlag Publications, 2011.
4. Subhes Bhattacharyya, “Rural Electrification Through
Decentralised Off-grid Systems in Developing Countries”,
Springer Verlag Publications, 2013.

References 1. Michael J. Moran and Howard N. Shapiro, “Fundamentals of

Engineering Thermodynamics”, 9th Edition, Jhon Wiley & Sons
Publications, 2018.
2. P.K Nag, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, McGraw Hill
Publications, 2013.
3. Swapan Basu, Ajay Kumar Debnath, “Power Plant
Instrumentation and Control”, Elsevier Publications, 2015.
4. Gilberto Franciso Martha de Souza, “Thermal Power Plant
Performance Analysis”, Springer Verlag Publications, 2012.

203 | P a g e
 5. Chetan Singh Solanki,“Solar Photovoltaics-Fundamentals,
Technologies and Application”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011.
6. Bin Wu and Yongqiang Lang, “Power Conversion and Control
of Wind energy Systems”, John Wiley and sons, Chi Chester, CA,
2011.
7. Subhes C. Bhattacharyya and Debajit Palit, “Mini-Grids for
Rural Electrification of Developing Countries”, Springer Verlag
Publications, 2014.
8. Tania Urmee and David Harries, “Photovoltaics for Rural
Electrification in Developing Countries”, Springer International
Publishing, Switzerland 2016.

Approved By:
__________________ ________________
Name (Course Instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.58. Power System Protection, Operation and Control

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4212
Course Title Power System Operation and Control
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical Engineering
Module Name Power System Protection, Operation and Control
Module Code ECEGM4217
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 - 80

Course Objectives ▪ To understand the concept of power system operation.

▪ To acquire sound understanding about optimal operation of power
systems, unit commitment, economic dispatching, etc.

204 | P a g e

Competences to be
Acquired
Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
▪ To learn and understand Load frequency control in single area
and two area
systems and Automatic voltage control.
▪ Critical thinking, Active listening and, written and oral
communication
▪ Interpersonal skills, Problem solving, Team work
▪ Interpret and understand pre-requisite and co-requisite courses
After completion of this course:
▪ The students will have clear understanding of operation of
hydropower, characteristics of generating units and analyze
transmission losses.
▪ The students will be able to calculate economic load dispatching
and solve unit commitment problems.
▪ The students will understand automatic generating control and
voltage control of a power system.
▪ Students should acquire the skill of MATLAB (Simulink) to
simulate the controlling systems designed using Simulink.
Power System Operation, Economic Dispatch and Unit Commitment,
Automatic Generation and Voltage Control
Course Contents
1. Power System Operation: Operation of hydropower station
with speed Governor; Characteristics of generating units;
Optimal operation of generations on a bus-bar; Switchyard
station, substation, switching stations; Power system structure
configurations; System configuration and service reliability;
Transmission Losses, B-Coefficient
2. Economic Dispatch and Unit Commitment: Introduction;
System constraints; Economic dispatch neglecting losses;
Optimum load dispatch including transmission losses;
Derivation of the transmission loss formula; Constraints in unit
commitment; Spinning reserve; Unit commitment solution
methods
3. Load Frequency Control: Speed governing mechanism; Speed
governor; Adjustment of governor characteristics; Transfer
function of speed control mechanism; The basics of load
frequency control; Flat frequency control; Real power balance
for load changes; Analysis of single area and two area systems;
Load frequency and economic dispatch controls.
205 | P a g e
 4. Voltage Control: Necessity of voltage control; Generation and
absorption of reactive power; Location of Voltage-control
equipment; Methods of voltage control: Effect of excitation
control, Analysis of generator voltage control; Rating of
synchronous phase modifier.
Pre-requisites ECEG4210: Power Systems
ECEG5231: Power System Planning & Management
Co-requisites ECEG5220: Energy Conversion and Rural Electrification

Year/Semester V/II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods Lecture supported by tutorial and assignments

Assessment/Evaluation& Grading - Continuous assessments (Quizzes, Assignments, Mid exam etc.)

System = 50%
- Final Exam = 50%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of
students Senate Legislation of our University throughout this
course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and
plagiarism will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments
provided according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on
time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more
than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own
value in your grade.
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the
class.
Text book 1. Power System Analysis Operation and Control, Abhijit
Chakrabarti and Sunita Halder, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Modern Power System Analysis, D.P.Kothari and
I.J.Nagrath, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
3rd Edition, 2003, Ninth Reprint 2007.

References 1. P.S.R Murty, Operation and Control in Power Systems, 2008

206 | P a g e
 2. Ramana, N. V - Power system operation and control (2010,
Pearson)
3. C. L. Wadhwa, Electrical Power Systems, 2012 by New
Academic Science Limited.
4. Allen J. Wood, Bruce F. Wollenberg, Gerald B. Sheblé - Power
Generation, Operation and Control, 3rd edition-Wiley-
Interscience (2013)
5. [Electrical Engineering Handbook Ser] Grigsby, Leonard L -
The Electric Power Engineering Handbook (2012, CRC Press)
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.59. Power Systems

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG4210
Course Title Power Systems
Degree Program B.Sc.
Module Name Power System, Protection, Operation and Control
Module Code ECEGM4217
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5 (2:2:1)
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 32 16 80

Course Objectives The course objectives include:

• Students will gain an understanding of load flow study and solve

power flow problems;
• Students will understand power system faults and analyse faults;
• Students will gain the basic analytical skills to solve power system
stability problems; and
• Students will develop the basic skills of analysing power system
transients.

Competences to be • The students will gain skills of analytical techniques of power/load

Acquired flow, fault and stability analyses.

207 | P a g e

Learning outcomes
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
• The students will develop the skills to analyze power system
transients.
After successful completion, the students will:
• Explain load flow study and solve power flow problems;
• Describe power system faults and calculate fault currents and
voltages;
• Select circuit breakers and fuses;
• Calculate and analyze power system stability; and
• Explain and analyze power system transients.
MATLAB, Power System Simulator
Power flow analysis, power system fault analysis, power stability and
analysis and power system transients
Course Contents
Chapter-1 Power Flow Studies
● Models of power system components
● Network model
● Formulation of power flow problem
● Solution of power flow problem
● Optimal load flow
Chapter-2 Power System Fault analysis
● Symmetrical 3-phase faults
● Symmetrical components
● Unsymmetrical faults.
Chapter-3 Power System Stability
▪ Stability & stability limit
▪ Swing equation
▪ Power angle equation
▪ Steady-state stability analysis
▪ Transient stability analysis
▪ Numerical solution of swing equation
Chapter-4 Transient Operation of Transmission Lines
▪ Travelling Waves on Single-Phase Lossless Lines
▪ Boundary Conditions for Single-Phase Lossless Lines
▪ Bewley Lattice Diagram of Single-Phase Lossless Lines
▪ Discrete time models of Single-Phase Lossless Lines
208 | P a g e
 ▪ Lossy Lines
▪ Multi-conductor Lines
▪ Power System Over-voltages
▪ Insulation Coordination

Chapter -5 Power System Reliability Analysis

● Definition of power system reliability and quality

● Reliability assessment techniques
● Reliability indices
● Interconnected Systems

Pre-requisites ECEG4117: Introduction to Power Systems

Co-requisites

Semester Year : 4, Semester :1

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods Lectures, tutorials, lab exercises

Assessment/Evaluation& Grading Continuous Assessment with Assignment, Tests and Projects (50%),
System
Final examination (50%)

Attendance Requirements 75% lecture attendance and 100% laboratory attendance

Course policy

Text book Textbook:

J. D. Glover, Thomas J. Overbye and M. S. Sarma, Power System

Analysis and Design, Brooks/Cole, Sixth Edition, 2016.

References 1. D P Kothari and I J Nagarath, Modern Power System Analysis, 4th

Edition, 2011

2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis, 3rd Edition, 2011.

3. Syed Nasar, Electrical Power Systems (Schaum’s Outline Series),

McGraw-hill Publishing Company, 2004.
Approved By:
_____________________ ________________
Name (Course Instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

209 | P a g e
8.3.60. Electrical Installation
Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG-4241
Course Title Electrical Installation
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name Energy Conversion and Distribution
Module Code ECEG-M4241
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 64

Course Objectives • Understand the science and art of internal and external
illumination of buildings.
• Understand different electrical installation materials,
components and accessories.
• Understand an electrical regulations and standards for consumer

Competences to be ▪ Study the science and art of internal and external illumination of
Acquired buildings

▪ Introduce themselves to new developments in lighting technology,

principles of energy efficient lighting and economics of lighting.

▪ Understand how to improve lighting efficiency with design,

maintenance, lighting levels, de-lamping, day lighting and control
strategies.

▪ Learn electrical regulations and standards for consumer premises

wiring design and construction.

▪ Learn contracting documentations and design and construction

drawings

Learning outcomes • Recognize the different conductor systems used in residential and
light commercial wiring in accordance with the codes and
authorities for installation.
• Explain the causes of overcurrent conditions and describe
electrical circuit overcurrent protective devices

210 | P a g e

Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
• Design and describe the installation of an electrical power
distribution system for a building, including the loads and circuits
required for various farm buildings and operations.
• Demonstrate wiring techniques for installing telephone and
computer cabling in new and existing dwellings
The student will learn many skills in this course, including how to cut,
bend and install wiring, how to hook up electrical appliances, and
how to install switches and light fixtures.
Illumination Science, Electrical regulation and standards , Electrical
installation materials, components and accessories ,Residential
installation design, Commercial(Industrial) installation design, Earthling,
Grounding system ,Testing of electrical installation, Electrical
installation contracting and Cost estimation, Contract document
preparation
Course Contents
1. Introduction to electrical systems design: Overview of power
distribution systems; Riser diagrams; Common electrical plan
symbols; System voltages; The National and International
Electrical Codes; Earthling (or Grounding)
2. Supply Requirements and Installation Materials in Houses
and Buildings: Introduction; Lighting Fixtures; Receptacles;
Electrical installation materials; components and accessories ;
Other loads
3. Illumination and Lighting Design: Light and Illumination;
Basic Principles in Lighting Design; Lighting Design Process;
Design Factors; Lighting Calculations
4. Electrical Plan and Installation Design: Residential
installation design; Commercial(Industrial) installation design
5. Branch Circuits: Branch Circuits in a Residence; Determining
the Kind; Number and Location of Outlets and Switches in a
Wiring System; Branch Circuit Design; Selection of Cables;
Circuit Breakers and Feeders
6. Introduction to AutoCAD:
7. Installation Cost Estimation & Contracting: Major Steps in
Cost Estimation; Bill of Quantity; Contract and Bids
8. Inspection and Testing: Initial inspection; Testing continuity
of protective conductors; Testing insulation resistance, Special
test; Testing polarity; Testing earth electrode resistance; Testing
earth fault loop impedance; External loop impedance
211 | P a g e
Pre-requisites Electrical Workshop Practice I (ECEG-2042)

Co-requisites ____

Year/Semester Year 4, semester II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods Lectures, tutorials, and Laboratory exercises

Assessment/Evaluation& Grading • Continuous assessment……………….. 50%

System • Final Examination……………………. 50%.

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of
students Senate Legislation of our University throughout this
course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and
plagiarism will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments
provided according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on
time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more
than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own
value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the
class.
Text book 1. Bill Atkinson, Roger Lovegrove: Electrical installation designs,
Blackwell Science ;3rd edition July,2002
2. Albert James Watkins: Electrical Installation Calculations,
Newnes; 6th Rev edition (October 1998)
3. Brian Scanddan: Electrical Installation Work, 5th Rev.Edition
Aug 10,2005
References 1. IEE regulations on Electrical Installation
2. Ethiopian Building Code Standard, Electrical Installation
of Buildings EBCS-10
3. Brian Scaddan: Electrical Installation Work third edition,
1999
4. Electrical Installation and Inspection standard, 2002 NEC
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature

212 | P a g e
 _________________ ________________
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.61. Power System Planning & Management

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5231
Course Title Power System Planning & Management
Degree Program B.Sc. in Electrical Engineering
Module Name Electrical Power Systems Planning and Management
Module Code ECEGM5237
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 5
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
2 Hours 3 Hours - 5 Hours

Course Objectives ▪ To understand load forecasting techniques.

▪ To learn and understand basics design concepts of generating
stations, switchyards, and transmission lines.
▪ To carry out cost analysis of generation systems.
▪ To carry out power system reliability analysis.

Competences to be ▪ Active listening, Critical thinking, Written and oral

Acquired communication
▪ Interpersonal skills, Problem solving, Team work
▪ Interpret and understand pre-requisite and co-requisite courses
Learning outcomes After completion of this course:

▪ The students will have a sound understanding of fundamentals

of load forecasting techniques.
▪ The students will be able to learn and understand basics design
concepts of generating stations, switchyards, and transmission
lines.
▪ The students will be able to carry out cost analysis of generation
systems.
▪ The students will have a sound understanding on analysis of
power system reliability and optimization of problems.

213 | P a g e
Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs
Load Forecasting, Electrical Power Systems Planning and Design,
Generation System Cost Analysis, Power System Reliability Analysis,
Optimization and Security
Course Contents

1. Load Forecasting: Introduction (Load Forecasting, Load

driving parameters, load characteristics, etc.); Short-term and
long-term forecasting; Load forecasting approach; Load
Forecasting Techniques; Long-term Load Forecasting using
econometric models (Peak-load demand model, time-series
analysis), least absolute estimation and least error square
algorithm; Estimation of average, trend terms and periodic
components.

2. Planning and Design: Introduction; Power system planning

needs and issues; Power system planning time-horizon
perspective; Considerations and instruments for power system
planning; General layout and design of generating stations;
Switchyard layout; Generation system planning; Transmission
system planning; Network Expansion Planning.

3. Generation System Cost Analysis: Introduction; Cost

Analysis (Capacity cost, Production Costs, Plant Cost, etc.);
Production Costing (Load Duration Curve, Probabilistic
Computation, Unserved Load Method);

4. Power System Reliability Analysis: Definition of power system

reliability and quality, Reliability assessment techniques,
Reliability indices, interconnected systems.

5. Optimization and Security: Formulation of the optimization

problem; Conditions for minimization; Sensitivity of the
objective function; Security
assessment

Pre-requisites ECEG4117: Introduction to Power Systems

ECEG4210: Power Systems
Co-requisites

Semester V/I

Status of Course Compulsory

214 | P a g e
Teaching & Learning Methods Lecture supported by tutorial and assignments

Assessment/Evaluation& Grading - Continuous assessments (Quizzes, Assignments, Mid exam etc.)

System = 50%
- Final Exam = 50%
Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of
students Senate Legislation of our University throughout this
course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and
plagiarism will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments
provided according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on
time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more
than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own
value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the
class.
Text book 1. R L Sullivan: Power System Planning, McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1977.
2. Xifan Wang James McDonald: Modern Power System
Planning, 2001.

References 1. Hossein Seifi, Mohammad Sadegh Sepasian (auth.) - Electric

Power System Planning: Issues, Algorithms and Solutions,
2011.
2. Juergen Schlabbach, Karl-Heinz Rofalski-Power System
Engineering_ Planning, Design, and Operation of Power
Systems and Equipment-Wiley-VCH (2008)
3. Modern Power System Analysis, D.P.Kothari and I.J.Nagrath,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2003,
Ninth Reprint 2007.
4. Richard E. Brown - Electric Power Distribution Reliability
(2008, CRC Press)
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________

215 | P a g e
 Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

8.3.62. Power System Protection

Aksum University
Aksum Institute of Technology
Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering
Course Code ECEG5214
Course Title Power System Protection
Degree Program BSc in Electrical and Computer Engineering
Module Name
Module Code ECEG-M4231
Module Coordinator NN
Lecturer NN
ECTS Credits 6
Student work load Lecture Tutorial Practice or Home study
Laboratory
32 48 32 48

Course Objectives The course aims to introduce students to the fundamentals of power
system protection and control.
• The students will understand the principles and concepts of
power system protection.
• The students will comprehend the operating principles and
design considerations of relays.
• The students will understand and learn protection of transmission
lines, generators, motors and transformers.
• The students will understand and know character and types of
Circuit breaker and Fuses.
• The students will be able to carry out over voltage protection of
power systems
Competences to be This course aims to provide the students with theoretical and practical
Acquired knowledge on power system protection. The students will become
familiar with the components, basic operating principles, main
applications, and limitations of protective relays and protection schemes.
The students will also learn strategies to design reliable protection
systems.
Learning outcomes After completing this course the student shall understand the following
items:

216 | P a g e

Skills (such as on software) to
acquire or required
Course Description
Week Cr. Hrs.
• Identify the challenges and solutions to industrial power system
protection problems.
• Select the appropriate protection schemes for various
applications.
• Identify, apply, and calculate settings for power lines,
transformer, generator and bus bar protection schemes.
• Describe current and voltage transformers and their impact on
protection scheme performance.
After completing this course the student should be able to:
• Investigate current and voltage transformers and its impact on
protection principles.
• Perform power system analysis subject to symmetrical and
unsymmetrical faults.
• Connect secondary current and voltage circuits of relay
protections.
• Select proper sets of relays and to measure characteristics of
protection.
• Calculate relay settings and test this in different operating
conditions.
Introduction to Power system protection; Relay Construction and
Operating Principle; Circuit breakers; Fuses; Protection Against
Overvoltage
Course Contents
Introduction to Power System protection: Definition of Power
system protection, Protective zones, Transmission line
protection, Transformer Protection, Bus-bar protection,
Generator protection, Induction motor protection.
Relay Construction and Operating Principles: Introduction,
Relaying elements and quantities; Operating principles of relays;
Relay types and characteristics.
Circuit Breakers: Introduction; Arc and arc extinction; Circuit
breaker rating; Circuit breaker types; HVDC circuit breakers.
Fuses: Introductions; Definitions; Fuse Characteristics; Types of
Fuses; Applications of HRC Fuses; Selection of Fuses;
Discrimination.
Protection against Overvoltage: Causes of overvoltage;
Lightning phenomena; Wave Shape of Voltage due to Lightning;
Over Voltage due to Lightning; Protection of Transmission Lines
217 | P a g e
 against Direct Lightning Strokes; Protection of Stations and Sub
– Stations from Direct Strokes.
Pre-requisites ECEG4210: Power Systems

Co-requisites _____

Year/Semester Year 5, Semester II

Status of Course Compulsory

Teaching & Learning Methods Lectures, tutorials, and Laboratory exercises

Assessment/Evaluation& Grading • Continuous assessment……………….. 50%

System • Final Examination……………………. 50%.

Course policy ▪ All students are expected to abide by the code of conduct of
students Senate Legislation of our University throughout this
course.
▪ Academic dishonesty, including cheating, fabrication, and
plagiarism will not be tolerated
▪ Class activities will vary day to day, ranging from lectures to
discussions. Students will be active participants in the course.
▪ You are required to submit and present the assignments
provided according to the time table indicated.
▪ 80 % of class attendance is mandatory! Please try to be on
time for class. I will not allow you enter if you are late more
than five minutes
▪ Active participation in class is essential and it will have its own
value in your grade
▪ Cell phones MUST be in flight mode or off before entering the
class.
Text book 1. Power System Protection and Switchgear By Badri Ram, D N
Vishwakarma

References 1. Modern Power System Analysis By D. P. Kothari, I. J. Nagrath

2. J. D. Glover and M. S. Sarma, Power System Analysis and
Design, Brooks/Cole, Fifth Edition.
3. Dr.Prof. Mohammed Tawfeeq, Power system protection, 2002
4. Power system protection by Institution of Electrical Engineers,
London, United Kingdom.
5. Power Systems Protective Relaying volume 4 by J.C. Das
Approved By:
_________________ ________________
Name (Course instructor) Signature
_________________ ________________

218 | P a g e
Name (Module Coordinator) Signature

219 | P a g e